1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2017-01-14.15} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 11% Free Software Foundation, Inc. 12% 13% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 14% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 15% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 16% License, or (at your option) any later version. 17% 18% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 19% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 20% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 21% General Public License for more details. 22% 23% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 24% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 25% 26% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 27% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 28% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 29% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 30% 31% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 32% reports; you can get the latest version from: 33% http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 34% http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 35% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 36% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 37% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 38% 39% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 40% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 41% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 42% 43% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 44% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 45% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 46% tex foo.texi 47% texindex foo.?? 48% tex foo.texi 49% tex foo.texi 50% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 51% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 52% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 53% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 54% 55% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 56% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 57% full Texinfo distribution. 58% 59% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 60 61 62\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 63 64% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 65% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 66% they might have appeared in the input file name. 67\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 69 70% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 71% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 72\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 73 74\chardef\other=12 75 76% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 77% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 78\let\+ = \relax 79 80% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 81\let\ptexb=\b 82\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 83\let\ptexc=\c 84\let\ptexcomma=\, 85\let\ptexdot=\. 86\let\ptexdots=\dots 87\let\ptexend=\end 88\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 89\let\ptexexclam=\! 90\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 91\let\ptexgtr=> 92\let\ptexhat=^ 93\let\ptexi=\i 94\let\ptexindent=\indent 95\let\ptexinsert=\insert 96\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 97\let\ptexless=< 98\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 99\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 100\let\ptexplus=+ 101\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 102\let\ptexrbrace=\} 103\let\ptexslash=\/ 104\let\ptexsp=\sp 105\let\ptexstar=\* 106\let\ptexsup=\sup 107\let\ptext=\t 108\let\ptextop=\top 109{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 110 111% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 112% starts a new line in the output. 113\newlinechar = `^^J 114 115% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 116% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 117% 118\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 119 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 120\else 121 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 122\fi 123 124% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 125\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 126\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 127\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 128\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 129\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 130\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 131\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 132\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 133\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 136\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 137\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 138\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 139\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 140\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 141\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 142\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 143\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 144\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 145% 146\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 155\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 156\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 157\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 158% 159\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 161\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 162\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 163\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 164 165% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 166\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 167 168% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 169\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 170 171\chardef\dashChar = `\- 172\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 173\chardef\underChar = `\_ 174 175% Ignore a token. 176% 177\def\gobble#1{} 178 179% The following is used inside several \edef's. 180\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 181 182% Hyphenation fixes. 183\hyphenation{ 184 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 185 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 186 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 187 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 188 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 189 spell-ing spell-ings 190 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 191 wide-spread wrap-around 192} 193 194% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 195% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 196% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 197% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 198% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 199% 200\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 201\def\loggingall{% 202 \tracingstats2 203 \tracingpages1 204 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 205 \tracingparagraphs1 206 \tracingoutput1 207 \tracingmacros2 208 \tracingrestores1 209 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 210 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 211 \tracingscantokens1 212 \tracingifs1 213 \tracinggroups1 214 \tracingnesting2 215 \tracingassigns1 216 \fi 217 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 218 \errorcontextlines16 219}% 220 221% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 222% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 223% after all. 224% 225\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 226\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 227 228% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 229% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 230% 231\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 232 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 233\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 234 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 235\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 236 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 237 238% Output routine 239% 240 241% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 242% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 243% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 244% 245\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 246 247% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 248% 249\newif\ifcropmarks 250\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 251% 252% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 253% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 254% 255\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 256\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 257\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 258\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 259 260% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 261% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 262% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 263% 264% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 265% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 266% 267% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 268% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 269% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 270 271% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 272% mark before the section break, and one after. 273% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs, 274% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs. 275% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 276% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 277% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 278% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 279% 280% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 281\def\domark{% 282 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 283 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 284 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 285 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 286 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 287 \mark{% 288 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 289 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 290 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 291 }% 292} 293 294% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 295% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 296% 297% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 298% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 299% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 300% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 301% first @chapter. 302\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 303 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 304 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 305} 306\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 307\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 308 309% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 310\def\lastchapterdefs{} 311\def\lastsectiondefs{} 312\def\lastsection{} 313\def\prevchapterdefs{} 314\def\prevsectiondefs{} 315\def\lastcolordefs{} 316 317% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 318\newdimen\bindingoffset 319\newdimen\normaloffset 320\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 321 322% Main output routine. 323% 324\chardef\PAGE = 255 325\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 326 327\newbox\headlinebox 328\newbox\footlinebox 329 330% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 331% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer, 332% cropmarks, and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page 333% to be written to the auxiliary files. 334% 335\def\onepageout#1{% 336 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 337 % 338 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 339 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 340 % 341 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 342 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 343 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 344 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 345 % 346 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 347 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 348 % values in \headline and \footline. 349 % 350 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. 351 \ifcase1\topmark\fi 352 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 353 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi 354 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 355 % 356 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 357 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 358 % 359 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 360 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter 361 \else 362 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank 363 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name 364 % being shown twice. 365 \def\thischapterheading{}% 366 \fi 367 % 368 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 369 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 370 % 371 {% 372 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 373 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 374 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 375 % before the \shipout runs. 376 % 377 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 378 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 379 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 380 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 381 % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 382 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 383 % it needs to be 384 % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym} 385 \shipout\vbox{% 386 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 387 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 388 % 389 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 390 \hsize = \outerhsize 391 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 392 \vtop to0pt{% 393 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 394 \nointerlineskip 395 \line{% 396 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 397 \hfill 398 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 399 }% 400 \vss}% 401 \vskip\topandbottommargin 402 \line\bgroup 403 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 404 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 405 \vbox\bgroup 406 \fi 407 % 408 \unvbox\headlinebox 409 \pagebody{#1}% 410 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 411 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 412 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 413 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 414 \vskip 24pt 415 \unvbox\footlinebox 416 \fi 417 % 418 \ifcropmarks 419 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 420 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 421 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 422 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 423 \vbox to0pt{\vss 424 \line{% 425 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 426 \hfill 427 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 428 }% 429 \nointerlineskip 430 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 431 }% 432 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 433 \fi 434 }% end of \shipout\vbox 435 }% end of group with \indexdummies 436 \advancepageno 437 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 438} 439 440\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 441 442% Main part of page, including any footnotes 443\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 444{\catcode`\@ =11 445\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 446% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 447\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 448 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 449\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 450\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 451\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 452} 453 454% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 455% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 456% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 457% 458\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 459\def\nstop{\vbox 460 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 461\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 462\def\nsbot{\vbox 463 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 464 465 466% Argument parsing 467 468% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 469% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 470% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 471% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 472% 473\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 474\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 475 \def\argtorun{#2}% 476 \begingroup 477 \obeylines 478 \spaceisspace 479 #1% 480 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 481} 482 483{\obeylines % 484 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 485 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 486 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 487 }% 488} 489 490% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc 491% comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces. 492\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 493\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm} 494\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 495 496% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 497% 498% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 499% @end itemize @c foo 500% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 501% by \finishparsearg. 502% 503\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 504\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 505\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 506 \def\temp{#3}% 507 \ifx\temp\empty 508 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 509 \let\temp\finishparsearg 510 \else 511 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 512 \fi 513 % Put the space token in: 514 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 515} 516 517% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 518% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 519% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 520% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 521% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 522% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 523% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 524% 525% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 526% 527\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 528 529 530% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 531% 532% \parseargdef\foo{...} 533% is roughly equivalent to 534% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 535% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 536\def\parseargdef#1{% 537 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 538} 539\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 540 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 541 \def#1##1% 542} 543 544% Several utility definitions with active space: 545{ 546 \obeyspaces 547 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 548 549 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 550 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 551 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 552 % should produce a line of output anyway. 553 % 554 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 555 556 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 557 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 558 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 559 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 560} 561 562 563\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 564 565% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 566% 567% \envdef\foo{...} 568% \def\Efoo{...} 569% 570% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 571% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 572% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 573% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 574% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 575% 576% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 577% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 578% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 579% special case.) 580 581 582% At run-time, environments start with this: 583\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 584% initialize 585\let\thisenv\empty 586 587% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 588\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 589\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 590 591% Check whether we're in the right environment: 592\def\checkenv#1{% 593 \def\temp{#1}% 594 \ifx\thisenv\temp 595 \else 596 \badenverr 597 \fi 598} 599 600% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 601\def\badenverr{% 602 \errhelp = \EMsimple 603 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 604 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 605} 606\def\inenvironment#1{% 607 \ifx#1\empty 608 outside of any environment% 609 \else 610 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 611 \fi 612} 613 614% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 615% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 616% 617\parseargdef\end{% 618 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 619 \else 620 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 621 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 622 \csname E#1\endcsname 623 \endgroup 624 \fi 625} 626 627\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 628 629 630% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 631% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 632% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 633% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 634% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 635{\catcode`@ = 11 636 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 637 % if the definition is written into an index file. 638 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 639 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 640} 641 642% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 643\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 644 645% @* forces a line break. 646\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 647 648% @/ allows a line break. 649\let\/=\allowbreak 650 651% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 652\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 653 654% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 655\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 656 657% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 658\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 659 660% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 661% 662\def\onword{on} 663\def\offword{off} 664% 665\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 666 \def\temp{#1}% 667 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 668 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 669 \else 670 \errhelp = \EMsimple 671 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 672 \fi\fi 673} 674 675% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 676% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 677% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 678\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 679 680% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 681% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 682% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 683% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 684% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 685% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 686% the text is small, which looks bad. 687% 688% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 689% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 690% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 691% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 692% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 693% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 694% 695\newbox\groupbox 696\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 697% 698\envdef\group{% 699 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 700 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 701 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 702 \fi 703 \startsavinginserts 704 % 705 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 706 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 707 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 708 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 709 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 710 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 711 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 712 \comment 713} 714% 715% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 716% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 717% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 718% above. But it's pretty close. 719\def\Egroup{% 720 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 721 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 722 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 723 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 724 \egroup % End the \vtop. 725 \addgroupbox 726 \prevdepth = \dimen1 727 \checkinserts 728} 729 730\def\addgroupbox{ 731 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 732 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 733 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 734 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 735 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 736 % group, force a page break. 737 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 738 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 739 \page 740 \fi 741 \fi 742 \box\groupbox 743} 744 745% 746% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 747% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 748% 749\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 750group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 751where each line of input produces a line of output.} 752 753% @need space-in-mils 754% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 755 756\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 757 758\parseargdef\need{% 759 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 760 % paragraph. 761 \par 762 % 763 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 764 \dimen0 = #1\mil 765 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 766 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 767 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 768 % 769 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 770 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 771 % And a page break here is fine. 772 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 773 % 774 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 775 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 776 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 777 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 778 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 779 % 780 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 781 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 782 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 783 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 784 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 785 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 786 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 787 \penalty9999 788 % 789 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 790 \kern -#1\mil 791 % 792 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 793 \nobreak 794 \fi 795} 796 797% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 798 799\let\br = \par 800 801% @page forces the start of a new page. 802% 803\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 804 805% @exdent text.... 806% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 807 808% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 809% That's how much \exdent should take out. 810\newskip\exdentamount 811 812% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 813\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 814 815% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 816\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 817 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 818 819% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 820% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 821% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 822% 823\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 824\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 825% 826\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 827 \nobreak 828 \kern-\strutdepth 829 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 830 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 831 \vss 832 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 833 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 834 \ifx#1l% 835 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 836 \else 837 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 838 \fi 839 \null 840 }% 841}} 842\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 843\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 844% 845% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 846% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 847% else use TEXT for both). 848% 849\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 850\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 851 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 852 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 853 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 854 \def\righttext{#2}% 855 \else 856 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 857 \def\righttext{#1}% 858 \fi 859 % 860 \ifodd\pageno 861 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 862 \else 863 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 864 \fi 865 \temp 866} 867 868% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 869% 870\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 871\def\includezzz#1{% 872 \pushthisfilestack 873 \def\thisfile{#1}% 874 {% 875 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 876 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 877 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 878 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 879 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 880 % 881 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 882 % definitions, etc. 883 \expandafter 884 }\temp 885 \popthisfilestack 886} 887\def\filenamecatcodes{% 888 \catcode`\\=\other 889 \catcode`~=\other 890 \catcode`^=\other 891 \catcode`_=\other 892 \catcode`|=\other 893 \catcode`<=\other 894 \catcode`>=\other 895 \catcode`+=\other 896 \catcode`-=\other 897 \catcode`\`=\other 898 \catcode`\'=\other 899} 900 901\def\pushthisfilestack{% 902 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 903} 904\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 905 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 906} 907\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 908 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 909} 910 911\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 912\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 913 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 914% 915\def\thisfile{} 916 917% @center line 918% outputs that line, centered. 919% 920\parseargdef\center{% 921 \ifhmode 922 \let\centersub\centerH 923 \else 924 \let\centersub\centerV 925 \fi 926 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 927 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 928} 929\def\centerH#1{{% 930 \hfil\break 931 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 932 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 933 \line{#1}% 934 \break 935}} 936% 937\newcount\centerpenalty 938\def\centerV#1{% 939 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 940 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 941 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 942 % prevent a page break here. 943 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 944 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 945 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 946 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 947} 948 949% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 950% 951\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 952 953% @comment ...line which is ignored... 954% @c is the same as @comment 955% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 956 957 958\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 959\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 960\cxxx} 961{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 962% 963\let\comment\c 964 965% @paragraphindent NCHARS 966% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 967% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 968% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 969% 970\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 971\def\noneword{none} 972% 973\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 974 \def\temp{#1}% 975 \ifx\temp\asisword 976 \else 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \defaultparindent = 0pt 979 \else 980 \defaultparindent = #1em 981 \fi 982 \fi 983 \parindent = \defaultparindent 984} 985 986% @exampleindent NCHARS 987% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 988% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 989% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 990\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 991 \def\temp{#1}% 992 \ifx\temp\asisword 993 \else 994 \ifx\temp\noneword 995 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 996 \else 997 \lispnarrowing = #1em 998 \fi 999 \fi 1000} 1001 1002% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1003% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1004% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1005% paragraphs. 1006% 1007% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1008% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1009% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1010% By default, we suppress indentation. 1011% 1012\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1013\def\insertword{insert} 1014% 1015\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1016 \def\temp{#1}% 1017 \ifx\temp\noneword 1018 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1019 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1020 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1021 \else 1022 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1023 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1024 \fi\fi 1025} 1026 1027% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1028% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1029% 1030% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1031% paragraph. 1032% 1033\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1034 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 1035 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 1036 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 1037} 1038% 1039\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1040 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1041 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1042 \global\everypar = {}% 1043} 1044 1045 1046% @refill is a no-op. 1047\let\refill=\relax 1048 1049% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1050\let\setfilename=\comment 1051 1052% @bye. 1053\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1054 1055 1056\message{pdf,} 1057% adobe `portable' document format 1058\newcount\tempnum 1059\newcount\lnkcount 1060\newtoks\filename 1061\newcount\filenamelength 1062\newcount\pgn 1063\newtoks\toksA 1064\newtoks\toksB 1065\newtoks\toksC 1066\newtoks\toksD 1067\newbox\boxA 1068\newbox\boxB 1069\newcount\countA 1070\newif\ifpdf 1071\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1072 1073% 1074% For LuaTeX 1075% 1076 1077\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1078\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1079 1080\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1081\else 1082 % Use Unicode destination names 1083 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1084 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1085 \begingroup 1086 \catcode`\%=12 1087 \directlua{ 1088 function UTF16oct(str) 1089 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1090 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1091 if c < 0x10000 then 1092 tex.sprint( 1093 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1094 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1095 (c / 256), (c % 256))) 1096 else 1097 c = c - 0x10000 1098 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1099 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1100 tex.sprint( 1101 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1102 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1103 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1104 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1105 (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), 1106 (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) 1107 end 1108 end 1109 end 1110 } 1111 \endgroup 1112 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1113 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1114 \begingroup 1115 \directlua{ 1116 function PDFescstr(str) 1117 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1118 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1119 tex.sprint( 1120 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1121 c)) 1122 else 1123 tex.sprint(string.char(c)) 1124 end 1125 end 1126 end 1127 } 1128 \endgroup 1129 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1130 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1131 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1132 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1133 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1134 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1135 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1136 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1137 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1138 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1139 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1140 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1141 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1142 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1143 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1144 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1145 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1146 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1147 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1148 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1149 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1150 \fi 1151\fi 1152 1153% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1154% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1155\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1156\else 1157 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1158 \else 1159 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1160 \else 1161 \pdftrue 1162 \fi 1163 \fi 1164\fi 1165 1166% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1167% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1168% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1169% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1170% 1171% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1172% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1173% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1174% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1175% do this reliably, so we use it. 1176 1177% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1178% which we \xdef. 1179\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1180 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1181 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1182 % Many times it won't matter. 1183 \xdef#1{#1}% 1184 \else 1185 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1186 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1187 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1188 \fi 1189} 1190\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1191 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1192 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1193 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1194 \else 1195 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1196 \fi 1197} 1198 1199\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1200with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1201be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1202output) for that.)} 1203 1204\ifpdf 1205 % 1206 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1207 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1208 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1209 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1210 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1211 % black by default, though. 1212 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1213 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1214 % 1215 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1216 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1217 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1218 % 1219 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1220 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1221 \def\setcolor#1{% 1222 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1223 \domark 1224 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1225 } 1226 % 1227 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1228 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1229 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1230 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1231 % 1232 \def\makefootline{% 1233 \baselineskip24pt 1234 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1235 } 1236 % 1237 \def\makeheadline{% 1238 \vbox to 0pt{% 1239 \vskip-22.5pt 1240 \line{% 1241 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1242 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1243 \getcolormarks 1244 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1245 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1246 }% 1247 \vss 1248 }% 1249 \nointerlineskip 1250 } 1251 % 1252 % 1253 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1254 % 1255 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1256 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1257 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1258 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1259 % 1260 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1261 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1262 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1263 % bitmap. 1264 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1265 \begingroup 1266 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1267 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1268 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1269 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1270 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1271 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1272 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1273 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1274 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1275 \fi 1276 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1277 \fi 1278 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1279 \fi 1280 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1281 \fi 1282 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1283 \fi 1284 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1285 \fi 1286 \closein 1 1287 \endgroup 1288 % 1289 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1290 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1291 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1292 \immediate\pdfimage 1293 \else 1294 \immediate\pdfximage 1295 \fi 1296 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1297 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1298 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1299 #1.\pdfimgext 1300 \else 1301 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1302 \fi 1303 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1304 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1305 \fi} 1306 % 1307 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1308 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1309 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1310 \indexnofonts 1311 \makevalueexpandable 1312 \turnoffactive 1313 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1314 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1315 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1316 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1317 \else 1318 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1319 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1320 \else 1321 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1322 \passthroughcharsfalse 1323 \fi 1324 \fi 1325 \else 1326 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1327 \passthroughcharsfalse 1328 \fi 1329 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1330 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1331 }} 1332 % 1333 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1334 \indexnofonts 1335 \makevalueexpandable 1336 \turnoffactive 1337 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1338 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1339 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1340 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1341 \passthroughcharstrue 1342 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1343 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1344 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1345 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1346 \else 1347 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1348 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1349 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1350 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1351 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1352 % Use ASCII approximations. 1353 \passthroughcharsfalse 1354 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1355 \else 1356 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1357 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1358 \passthroughcharstrue 1359 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1360 \fi 1361 \else 1362 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1363 % Use ASCII approximations. 1364 \passthroughcharsfalse 1365 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1366 \fi 1367 \fi 1368 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1369 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1370 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1371 }} 1372 % 1373 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1374 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1375 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1376 } 1377 % 1378 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1379 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1380 % 1381 % by default, use black for everything. 1382 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1383 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1384 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1385 % 1386 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1387 % come from Petr Olsak 1388 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1389 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1390 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1391 \advance\tempnum by 1 1392 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1393 % 1394 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1395 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1396 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1397 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1398 % #4 is the page number 1399 % 1400 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1401 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1402 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1403 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1404 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1405 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1406 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1407 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1408 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1409 \fi 1410 % 1411 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1412 } 1413 % 1414 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1415 \begingroup 1416 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1417 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1418 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1419 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1420 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1421 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1422 }% 1423 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1424 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1425 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1426 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1427 }% 1428 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1429 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1430 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1431 }% 1432 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1433 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1434 }% 1435 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1436 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1437 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1438 % 1439 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1440 % al. a second time, below. 1441 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1442 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1443 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1444 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1445 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1446 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1447 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1448 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1449 \readdatafile{toc}% 1450 % 1451 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1452 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1453 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1454 % 1455 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1456 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1457 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1458 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1459 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1460 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1461 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1462 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1463 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1464 % 1465 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1466 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1467 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1468 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1469 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1470 % 1471 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1472 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1473 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1474 % we use for the index sort strings. 1475 % 1476 \indexnofonts 1477 \setupdatafile 1478 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1479 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1480 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1481 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1482 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1483 \input \tocreadfilename 1484 \endgroup 1485 } 1486 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1487 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1488 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1489 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1490 ] 1491 % 1492 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1493 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1494 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1495 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1496 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1497 \fi 1498 \nextsp} 1499 \def\getfilename#1{% 1500 \filenamelength=0 1501 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1502 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1503 \edef\temp{#1}% 1504 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1505 } 1506 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1507 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1508 \else 1509 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1510 \fi 1511 % make a live url in pdf output. 1512 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1513 \begingroup 1514 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1515 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1516 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1517 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1518 % 1519 \normalturnoffactive 1520 \def\@{@}% 1521 \let\/=\empty 1522 \makevalueexpandable 1523 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1524 % special-casing \var here? 1525 \def\var##1{##1}% 1526 % 1527 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1528 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1529 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1530 \endgroup} 1531 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1532 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1533 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1534 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1535 \def\maketoks{% 1536 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1537 \ifx\first0\adn0 1538 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1539 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1540 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1541 \else 1542 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1543 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1544 \let\next=\maketoks 1545 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1546 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1547 \fi 1548 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1549 \next} 1550 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1551 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1552 \def\pdflink#1{% 1553 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1554 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1555 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1556\else 1557 % non-pdf mode 1558 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1559 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1560 \let\endlink = \relax 1561 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1562 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1563 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1564\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1565 1566% 1567% For XeTeX 1568% 1569\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1570\else 1571 % 1572 % XeTeX version check 1573 % 1574 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1575 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1576 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1577 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1578 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1579 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1580 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1581 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1582 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1583 \else 1584 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1585 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1586 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1587 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1588 % 1589 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1590 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1591 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1592 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1593 \fi 1594 % 1595 % Color support 1596 % 1597 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1598 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1599 % 1600 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1601 % 1602 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1603 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1604 \def\setcolor#1{% 1605 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1606 \domark 1607 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1608 } 1609 % 1610 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1611 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1612 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1613 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1614 % 1615 \def\makefootline{% 1616 \baselineskip24pt 1617 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1618 } 1619 % 1620 \def\makeheadline{% 1621 \vbox to 0pt{% 1622 \vskip-22.5pt 1623 \line{% 1624 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1625 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1626 \getcolormarks 1627 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1628 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1629 }% 1630 \vss 1631 }% 1632 \nointerlineskip 1633 } 1634 % 1635 % PDF outline support 1636 % 1637 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1638 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1639 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1640 } 1641 % 1642 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1643 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1644 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1645 \indexnofonts 1646 \makevalueexpandable 1647 \turnoffactive 1648 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1649 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1650 \else 1651 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1652 \passthroughcharsfalse 1653 \fi 1654 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1655 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1656 }} 1657 % 1658 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1659 \turnoffactive 1660 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1661 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1662 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1663 % So we do not convert. 1664 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1665 }} 1666 % 1667 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1668 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1669 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1670 } 1671 % 1672 % by default, use black for everything. 1673 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1674 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1675 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1676 % 1677 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1678 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1679 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1680 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1681 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1682 \fi 1683 % 1684 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1685 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1686 } 1687 % 1688 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1689 \begingroup 1690 % 1691 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1692 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1693 % 1694 % We use node names as destinations. 1695 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1696 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1697 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1698 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1699 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1700 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1701 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1702 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1703 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1704 % 1705 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1706 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1707 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1708 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1709 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% 1710 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1711 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1712 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1713 % 1714 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1715 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1716 % 1717 \indexnofonts 1718 \setupdatafile 1719 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1720 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1721 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1722 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1723 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1724 \input \tocreadfilename 1725 \endgroup 1726 } 1727 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1728 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1729 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1730 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1731 ] 1732 1733 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1734 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1735 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1736 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1737 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1738 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1739% 1740 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1741 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1742 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1743 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1744 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1745 \fi 1746 \nextsp} 1747 \def\getfilename#1{% 1748 \filenamelength=0 1749 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1750 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1751 \edef\temp{#1}% 1752 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1753 } 1754 % make a live url in pdf output. 1755 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1756 \begingroup 1757 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1758 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1759 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1760 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1761 % 1762 \normalturnoffactive 1763 \def\@{@}% 1764 \let\/=\empty 1765 \makevalueexpandable 1766 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1767 % special-casing \var here? 1768 \def\var##1{##1}% 1769 % 1770 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1771 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1772 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1773 \endgroup} 1774 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1775 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1776 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1777 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1778 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1779 \def\maketoks{% 1780 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1781 \ifx\first0\adn0 1782 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1783 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1784 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1785 \else 1786 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1787 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1788 \let\next=\maketoks 1789 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1790 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1791 \fi 1792 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1793 \next} 1794 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1795 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1796 \def\pdflink#1{% 1797 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1798 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1799 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1800 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1801% 1802 % 1803 % @image support 1804 % 1805 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1806 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1807 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1808 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1809 % 1810 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1811 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1812 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1813 % bitmap. 1814 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1815 \begingroup 1816 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1817 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1818 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1819 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1820 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1821 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1822 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1823 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1824 \fi 1825 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1826 \fi 1827 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1828 \fi 1829 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1830 \fi 1831 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1832 \fi 1833 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1834 \fi 1835 \closein 1 1836 \endgroup 1837 % 1838 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1839 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1840 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1841 \else 1842 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1843 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1844 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1845 \else 1846 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1847 \fi 1848 \fi 1849 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1850 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1851 } 1852\fi 1853 1854 1855% 1856\message{fonts,} 1857 1858% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1859% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1860% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1861% 1862\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1863\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1864\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1865% 1866% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1867\def\baselinefactor{1} 1868% 1869\newdimen\textleading 1870\def\setleading#1{% 1871 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1872 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1873 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1874 \normalbaselines 1875 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1876 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1877 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1878 }% 1879} 1880 1881% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1882% 1883% do nothing with this by default. 1884\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1885\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1886\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1887 1888% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1889% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1890% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1891\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1892 \begingroup 1893 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1894 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1895%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1896%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1897%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1898%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1899%%Version: 1.000 1900%%EndComments 1901/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 190212 dict begin 1903begincmap 1904/CIDSystemInfo 1905<< /Registry (TeX) 1906/Ordering (OT1) 1907/Supplement 0 1908>> def 1909/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1910/CMapType 2 def 19111 begincodespacerange 1912<00> <7F> 1913endcodespacerange 19148 beginbfrange 1915<00> <01> <0393> 1916<09> <0A> <03A8> 1917<23> <26> <0023> 1918<28> <3B> <0028> 1919<3F> <5B> <003F> 1920<5D> <5E> <005D> 1921<61> <7A> <0061> 1922<7B> <7C> <2013> 1923endbfrange 192440 beginbfchar 1925<02> <0398> 1926<03> <039B> 1927<04> <039E> 1928<05> <03A0> 1929<06> <03A3> 1930<07> <03D2> 1931<08> <03A6> 1932<0B> <00660066> 1933<0C> <00660069> 1934<0D> <0066006C> 1935<0E> <006600660069> 1936<0F> <00660066006C> 1937<10> <0131> 1938<11> <0237> 1939<12> <0060> 1940<13> <00B4> 1941<14> <02C7> 1942<15> <02D8> 1943<16> <00AF> 1944<17> <02DA> 1945<18> <00B8> 1946<19> <00DF> 1947<1A> <00E6> 1948<1B> <0153> 1949<1C> <00F8> 1950<1D> <00C6> 1951<1E> <0152> 1952<1F> <00D8> 1953<21> <0021> 1954<22> <201D> 1955<27> <2019> 1956<3C> <00A1> 1957<3D> <003D> 1958<3E> <00BF> 1959<5C> <201C> 1960<5F> <02D9> 1961<60> <2018> 1962<7D> <02DD> 1963<7E> <007E> 1964<7F> <00A8> 1965endbfchar 1966endcmap 1967CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1968end 1969end 1970%%EndResource 1971%%EOF 1972 }\endgroup 1973 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1974 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1975 }% 1976% 1977% \cmapOT1IT 1978 \begingroup 1979 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1980 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1981%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1982%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1983%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1984%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1985%%Version: 1.000 1986%%EndComments 1987/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 198812 dict begin 1989begincmap 1990/CIDSystemInfo 1991<< /Registry (TeX) 1992/Ordering (OT1IT) 1993/Supplement 0 1994>> def 1995/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1996/CMapType 2 def 19971 begincodespacerange 1998<00> <7F> 1999endcodespacerange 20008 beginbfrange 2001<00> <01> <0393> 2002<09> <0A> <03A8> 2003<25> <26> <0025> 2004<28> <3B> <0028> 2005<3F> <5B> <003F> 2006<5D> <5E> <005D> 2007<61> <7A> <0061> 2008<7B> <7C> <2013> 2009endbfrange 201042 beginbfchar 2011<02> <0398> 2012<03> <039B> 2013<04> <039E> 2014<05> <03A0> 2015<06> <03A3> 2016<07> <03D2> 2017<08> <03A6> 2018<0B> <00660066> 2019<0C> <00660069> 2020<0D> <0066006C> 2021<0E> <006600660069> 2022<0F> <00660066006C> 2023<10> <0131> 2024<11> <0237> 2025<12> <0060> 2026<13> <00B4> 2027<14> <02C7> 2028<15> <02D8> 2029<16> <00AF> 2030<17> <02DA> 2031<18> <00B8> 2032<19> <00DF> 2033<1A> <00E6> 2034<1B> <0153> 2035<1C> <00F8> 2036<1D> <00C6> 2037<1E> <0152> 2038<1F> <00D8> 2039<21> <0021> 2040<22> <201D> 2041<23> <0023> 2042<24> <00A3> 2043<27> <2019> 2044<3C> <00A1> 2045<3D> <003D> 2046<3E> <00BF> 2047<5C> <201C> 2048<5F> <02D9> 2049<60> <2018> 2050<7D> <02DD> 2051<7E> <007E> 2052<7F> <00A8> 2053endbfchar 2054endcmap 2055CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2056end 2057end 2058%%EndResource 2059%%EOF 2060 }\endgroup 2061 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2062 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2063 }% 2064% 2065% \cmapOT1TT 2066 \begingroup 2067 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2068 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2069%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2070%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2071%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2072%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2073%%Version: 1.000 2074%%EndComments 2075/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 207612 dict begin 2077begincmap 2078/CIDSystemInfo 2079<< /Registry (TeX) 2080/Ordering (OT1TT) 2081/Supplement 0 2082>> def 2083/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2084/CMapType 2 def 20851 begincodespacerange 2086<00> <7F> 2087endcodespacerange 20885 beginbfrange 2089<00> <01> <0393> 2090<09> <0A> <03A8> 2091<21> <26> <0021> 2092<28> <5F> <0028> 2093<61> <7E> <0061> 2094endbfrange 209532 beginbfchar 2096<02> <0398> 2097<03> <039B> 2098<04> <039E> 2099<05> <03A0> 2100<06> <03A3> 2101<07> <03D2> 2102<08> <03A6> 2103<0B> <2191> 2104<0C> <2193> 2105<0D> <0027> 2106<0E> <00A1> 2107<0F> <00BF> 2108<10> <0131> 2109<11> <0237> 2110<12> <0060> 2111<13> <00B4> 2112<14> <02C7> 2113<15> <02D8> 2114<16> <00AF> 2115<17> <02DA> 2116<18> <00B8> 2117<19> <00DF> 2118<1A> <00E6> 2119<1B> <0153> 2120<1C> <00F8> 2121<1D> <00C6> 2122<1E> <0152> 2123<1F> <00D8> 2124<20> <2423> 2125<27> <2019> 2126<60> <2018> 2127<7F> <00A8> 2128endbfchar 2129endcmap 2130CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2131end 2132end 2133%%EndResource 2134%%EOF 2135 }\endgroup 2136 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2137 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2138 }% 2139\fi\fi 2140 2141 2142% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2143% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2144% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2145% Example: 2146% #1 = \textrm 2147% #2 = \rmshape 2148% #3 = 10 2149% #4 = \mainmagstep 2150% #5 = OT1 2151% 2152\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2153 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2154 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2155} 2156% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2157\let\cmap\gobble 2158% 2159% (end of cmaps) 2160 2161% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2162% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2163% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2164\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2165\def\fontprefix{cm} 2166\fi 2167% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2168\def\rmshape{r} 2169\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2170\def\bfshape{b} 2171\def\bxshape{bx} 2172\def\ttshape{tt} 2173\def\ttbshape{tt} 2174\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2175\def\itshape{ti} 2176\def\itbshape{bxti} 2177\def\slshape{sl} 2178\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2179\def\sfshape{ss} 2180\def\sfbshape{ss} 2181\def\scshape{csc} 2182\def\scbshape{csc} 2183 2184% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2185% 2186\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2187% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2188\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2189\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2190\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2191\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2192\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2193\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2194\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2195\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2196\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2197\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2198\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2199\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2200\def\textecsize{1095} 2201 2202% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2203\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2204\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2205\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2206\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2207\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2208\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2209 2210% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2211\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2212\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2213\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2214\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2215\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2216\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2217\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2218\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2219\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2220\font\smalli=cmmi9 2221\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2222\def\smallecsize{0900} 2223 2224% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2225\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2226\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2227\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2228\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2229\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2230\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2231\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2232\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2233\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2234\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2235\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2236\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2237 2238% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2239\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2240\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2241\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2242\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2243\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2244\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2245\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2246\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2247\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2248\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2249\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2250\def\titleecsize{2074} 2251 2252% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2253\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2254\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2255\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2256\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2257\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2258\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2259\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2260\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2261\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2262\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2263\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2264\def\chapecsize{1728} 2265 2266% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2267\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2268\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2269\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2270\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2271\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2272\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2273\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2274\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2275\let\secbf\secrm 2276\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2277\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2278\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2279\def\sececsize{1440} 2280 2281% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2282\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2283\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2284\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2285\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2286\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2287\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2288\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2289\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2290\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2291\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2292\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2293\def\ssececsize{1200} 2294 2295% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2296\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2297\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2298\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2299\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2300\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2301\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2302\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2303\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2304\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2305\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2306\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2307\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2308 2309\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2310\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2311\rm 2312} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2313 2314 2315% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2316% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2317% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2318% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2319% 2320\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2321% Text fonts (10pt). 2322\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2323\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2324\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2325\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2326\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2327\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2328\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2329\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2330\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2331\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2332\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2333\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2334\def\textecsize{1000} 2335 2336% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2337\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2338\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2339\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2340\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2341\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2342\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2343 2344% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2345\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2346\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2347\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2348\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2349\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2350\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2351\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2352\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2353\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2354\font\smalli=cmmi9 2355\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2356\def\smallecsize{0900} 2357 2358% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2359\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2360\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2361\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2362\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2363\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2364\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2365\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2366\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2367\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2368\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2369\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2370\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2371 2372% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2373\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2374\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2375\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2376\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2377\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2378\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2380\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2381\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2382\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2383\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2384\def\titleecsize{2074} 2385 2386% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2387\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2388\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2389\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2390\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2391\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2393\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2394\let\chapbf\chaprm 2395\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2396\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2397\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2398\def\chapecsize{1440} 2399 2400% Section fonts (12pt). 2401\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2402\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2403\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2404\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2405\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2406\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2407\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2408\let\secbf\secrm 2409\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2410\font\seci=cmmi12 2411\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2412\def\sececsize{1200} 2413 2414% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2415\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2416\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2417\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2418\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2419\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2420\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2421\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2422\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2423\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2424\font\sseci=cmmi10 2425\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2426\def\ssececsize{1000} 2427 2428% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2429\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2430\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2431\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2432\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2433\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2434\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2435\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2436\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2437\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2438\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2439\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2440\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2441 2442\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2443\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2444\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2445\rm 2446} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2447 2448% Fonts for short table of contents. 2449\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2450\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2451\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2452\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2453 2454 2455% We provide the user-level command 2456% @fonttextsize 10 2457% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2458% 2459\def\xiword{11} 2460\def\xword{10} 2461\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2462% 2463\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2464 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2465 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2466 % 2467 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2468 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2469 % 2470 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2471 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2472 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2473 \else 2474 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2475 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2476 \fi\fi 2477 \endgroup 2478} 2479 2480% 2481% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2482% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2483% italics, not bold italics. 2484% 2485\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2486 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2487 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2488} 2489 2490\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2491\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2492\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2493\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2494\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 2495 2496% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2497% So we set up a \sf. 2498\newfam\sffam 2499\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2500 2501% We don't need math for this font style. 2502\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2503 2504 2505% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2506% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. We don't 2507% bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2508% 2509\def\resetmathfonts{% 2510 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2511 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2512 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2513} 2514 2515% 2516 2517% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2518% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2519% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2520% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2521% 2522% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2523% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2524% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2525% 2526% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2527% 2528 2529\def\assignfonts#1{% 2530 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2531 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2532 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2533 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2534 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2535 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2536 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2537 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2538 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2539 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2540} 2541 2542\newif\ifrmisbold 2543 2544% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2545% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2546% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2547\def\switchtolllsize{% 2548 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2549 \ifrmisbold 2550 \let\rmfont\bffont 2551 \fi 2552 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2553}% 2554 2555\def\switchtolsize{% 2556 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2557 \ifrmisbold 2558 \let\rmfont\bffont 2559 \fi 2560 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2561}% 2562 2563\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2564\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2565 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2566 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2567 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2568 \assignfonts{#1}% 2569 \resetmathfonts 2570 \setleading{#4}% 2571}} 2572 2573\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2574\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2575\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2576\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2577\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2578\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2579\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2580\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2581 2582\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2583\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2584\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2585 2586% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2587\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2588\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2589 2590% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2591\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2592 2593% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2594% can fit this many characters: 2595% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2596% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2597% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2598% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2599% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2600% 2601% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2602% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2603% --karl, 24jan03. 2604 2605% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2606% 2607\definetextfontsizexi 2608 2609 2610\message{markup,} 2611 2612% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2613% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2614% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2615% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2616% 2617\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2618 2619% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2620% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2621% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2622% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles 2623% currently in effect. 2624\newif\ifmarkupvar 2625\newif\ifmarkupsamp 2626\newif\ifmarkupkey 2627%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. 2628%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. 2629\newif\ifmarkupcode 2630\newif\ifmarkupkbd 2631%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. 2632%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. 2633\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). 2634\newif\ifmarkupexample 2635\newif\ifmarkupverb 2636\newif\ifmarkupverbatim 2637 2638\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2639 2640\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2641 \csname markup#1true\endcsname 2642 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2643 \markupstylesetup 2644} 2645 2646\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2647 2648\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2649 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2650 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2651 \def#1% 2652} 2653 2654% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2655\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2656 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2657 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2658 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2659} 2660 2661\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2662 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2663 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2664 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2665} 2666 2667{ 2668\catcode`\'=\active 2669\catcode`\`=\active 2670 2671\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2672\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2673 2674\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2675\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2676} 2677 2678\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2679\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2680% 2681\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2682\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2683% 2684\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2685\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2686% 2687\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2688\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2689% 2690\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2691\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2692% 2693\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2694\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2695 2696% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2697% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2698% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2699% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2700% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2701% 2702\def\codequoteright{% 2703 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2704 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2705 '% 2706 \else \char'15 \fi 2707 \else \char'15 \fi 2708} 2709% 2710% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2711% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2712% the code environments to do likewise. 2713% 2714\def\codequoteleft{% 2715 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2716 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2717 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2718 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2719 \relax`% 2720 \else \char'22 \fi 2721 \else \char'22 \fi 2722} 2723 2724% Commands to set the quote options. 2725% 2726\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2727 \def\temp{#1}% 2728 \ifx\temp\onword 2729 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2730 = t% 2731 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2732 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2733 = \relax 2734 \else 2735 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2736 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2737 \fi\fi 2738} 2739% 2740\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2741 \def\temp{#1}% 2742 \ifx\temp\onword 2743 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2744 = t% 2745 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2746 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2747 = \relax 2748 \else 2749 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2750 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2751 \fi\fi 2752} 2753 2754% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2755\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2756 2757% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2758\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2759 2760% Font commands. 2761 2762% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2763% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2764% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2765\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2766 \ifusingtt 2767 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2768 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2769 \next 2770} 2771\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2772\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2773 2774% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2775% character) is such as not to need one. 2776\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2777 \ifx\next,% 2778 \else\ifx\next-% 2779 \else\ifx\next.% 2780 \else\ifx\next\.% 2781 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2782 \else\ptexslash 2783 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2784 \aftersmartic 2785} 2786 2787% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2788\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2789 2790% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2791% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2792\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2793 2794\def\aftersmartic{} 2795\def\var#1{% 2796 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2797 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2798 \smartslanted{#1}% 2799} 2800 2801\let\i=\smartitalic 2802\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2803\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2804\let\emph=\smartitalic 2805 2806% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2807\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2808\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2809\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2810 2811% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2812\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2813\let\strong=\b 2814 2815% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2816\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2817 2818% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2819% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2820% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2821% 2822\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2823\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2824 2825% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2826% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2827% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2828% 2829\catcode`@=11 2830 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2831 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2832 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2833 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2834 } 2835 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2836 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2837 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2838 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2839 } 2840\catcode`@=\other 2841\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2842 2843% @t, explicit typewriter. 2844\def\t#1{% 2845 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2846 \null 2847} 2848 2849% @samp. 2850\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2851 2852% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2853\let\indicateurl=\samp 2854 2855% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2856% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2857% This is a subroutine for that. 2858\def\tclose#1{% 2859 {% 2860 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2861 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2862 % 2863 % Switch to typewriter. 2864 \tt 2865 % 2866 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2867 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2868 % 2869 % Turn off hyphenation. 2870 \nohyphenation 2871 % 2872 \rawbackslash 2873 \plainfrenchspacing 2874 #1% 2875 }% 2876 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2877} 2878 2879% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2880% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2881% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2882% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2883% 2884% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2885% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2886% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2887% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2888{ 2889 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2890 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2891 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2892 % 2893 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2894 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2895 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2896 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2897 \ifallowcodebreaks 2898 \let-\codedash 2899 \let_\codeunder 2900 \else 2901 \let-\normaldash 2902 \let_\realunder 2903 \fi 2904 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2905 % after the hyphen. 2906 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2907 % 2908 \codex 2909 } 2910 % 2911 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2912 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2913 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2914 % 2915 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2916 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2917 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2918 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2919 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2920 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2921 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2922 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2923 \fi 2924 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2925 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2926 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2927 } 2928} 2929\def\normaldash{-} 2930% 2931\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2932 2933\def\codeunder{% 2934 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2935 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2936 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2937 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2938 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2939 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2940 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2941 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2942 {\_}% 2943} 2944 2945% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2946% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2947% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2948% and _ on and off. 2949% 2950\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2951 2952\def\keywordtrue{true} 2953\def\keywordfalse{false} 2954 2955\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2956 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2957 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2958 \allowcodebreakstrue 2959 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2960 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2961 \else 2962 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2963 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2964 \fi\fi 2965} 2966 2967% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2968% so use \code rather than \samp. 2969\let\command=\code 2970\let\env=\code 2971\let\file=\code 2972\let\option=\code 2973 2974% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2975% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2976% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2977% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2978 2979% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2980% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2981\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2982 2983% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 2984% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 2985% didn't support automatic breaking.) 2986\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2987\let\uref=\urefbreak 2988% 2989\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2990\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2991 \unsepspaces 2992 \pdfurl{#1}% 2993 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2994 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2995 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2996 \else 2997 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 2998 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2999 \ifpdf 3000 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3001 \ifurefurlonlylink 3002 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3003 \unhbox0 3004 \else 3005 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3006 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3007 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3008 \fi 3009 \else 3010 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3011 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3012 \else 3013 % For XeTeX 3014 \ifurefurlonlylink 3015 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3016 \unhbox0 3017 \else 3018 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3019 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3020 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3021 \fi 3022 \fi 3023 \fi 3024 \else 3025 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3026 \fi 3027 \fi 3028 \endlink 3029\endgroup} 3030 3031% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3032\def\urefcatcodes{% 3033 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3034 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3035 \catcode`\/=\active 3036} 3037{ 3038 \urefcatcodes 3039 % 3040 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3041 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3042 \urefcatcodes 3043 \let&\urefcodeamp 3044 \let.\urefcodedot 3045 \let#\urefcodehash 3046 \let?\urefcodequest 3047 \let/\urefcodeslash 3048 \codex 3049 } 3050 % 3051 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3052 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3053 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3054 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3055 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3056 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3057} 3058 3059% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 3060% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 3061% cmtt at least, especially for dots. 3062\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em} 3063\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em} 3064\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3065\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3066% 3067\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 3068\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 3069\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 3070\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 3071\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3072{ 3073 \catcode`\/=\active 3074 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3075 \urefprestretch \slashChar 3076 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3077 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3078 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 3079 } 3080} 3081 3082% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 3083% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 3084% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 3085% 3086\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3087 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3088 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3089 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3090 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3091 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3092 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3093 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 3094 \else 3095 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3096 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3097 \fi\fi\fi 3098} 3099\def\wordafter{after} 3100\def\wordbefore{before} 3101\def\wordnone{none} 3102 3103\urefbreakstyle after 3104 3105% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3106% 3107\let\url=\uref 3108 3109% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3110% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3111% 3112%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3113\ifpdf 3114 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3115 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3116 \unsepspaces 3117 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3118 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3119 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3120 \endlink 3121 \endgroup} 3122\else 3123 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3124 \let\email=\uref 3125 \else 3126 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3127 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3128 \unsepspaces 3129 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3130 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3131 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3132 \endlink 3133 \endgroup} 3134 \fi 3135\fi 3136 3137% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3138% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3139% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3140\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3141 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3142 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3143 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3144 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3145 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3146 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3147 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3148 \else 3149 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3150 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3151 \fi\fi\fi 3152} 3153\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3154\def\wordexample{example} 3155\def\wordcode{code} 3156 3157% Default is `distinct'. 3158\kbdinputstyle distinct 3159 3160% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3161% then @kbd has no effect. 3162\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3163 3164\def\xkey{\key} 3165\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3166 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3167 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3168 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3169 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3170} 3171 3172% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3173%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3174%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3175%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3176% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3177% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3178% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3179% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3180% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3181 3182% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3183% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3184% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3185% 3186\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3187 \nohyphenation 3188 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3189 #1}\null} 3190 3191% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3192\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3193 3194% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3195\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3196\def\click{\arrow} 3197 3198% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3199% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3200% 3201\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3202 3203% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3204% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3205% all-uppercase. 3206% 3207\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3208\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3209 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3210 \def\temp{#2}% 3211 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3212 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3213 \fi 3214 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3215} 3216 3217% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3218% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3219% 3220\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3221\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3222 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3223 \def\temp{#2}% 3224 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3225 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3226 \fi 3227 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3228} 3229 3230% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3231% 3232\def\asis#1{#1} 3233 3234% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3235% 3236% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3237% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3238% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3239% which is what @var uses. 3240{ 3241 \catcode`\_ = \active 3242 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3243 \catcode`\_=\active 3244 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3245 } 3246} 3247% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3248% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3249% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3250% 3251% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3252\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3253% 3254\def\math{% 3255 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3256 \tex 3257 \mathunderscore 3258 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3259 \mathactive 3260 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3261 \let\"=\ddot 3262 \let\'=\acute 3263 \let\==\bar 3264 \let\^=\hat 3265 \let\`=\grave 3266 \let\u=\breve 3267 \let\v=\check 3268 \let\~=\tilde 3269 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3270 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3271 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3272 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3273} 3274\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3275 3276% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3277% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3278% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3279% 3280{ 3281 \catcode`^ = \active 3282 \catcode`< = \active 3283 \catcode`> = \active 3284 \catcode`+ = \active 3285 \catcode`' = \active 3286 \gdef\mathactive{% 3287 \let^ = \ptexhat 3288 \let< = \ptexless 3289 \let> = \ptexgtr 3290 \let+ = \ptexplus 3291 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3292 } 3293} 3294 3295% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3296% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3297% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3298% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3299% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3300% 3301\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3302\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3303% 3304\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3305\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3306 3307% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3308% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3309% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3310% 3311\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3312% 3313\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3314\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3315 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3316 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3317} 3318% 3319% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3320% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3321\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3322\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3323 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3324 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3325} 3326% 3327% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3328% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3329% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3330% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3331% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3332% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3333% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3334% 3335\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3336\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3337\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3338 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3339 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3340 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3341} 3342 3343% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3344% 3345\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3346\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3347 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3348 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3349 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3350} 3351 3352% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3353% 3354\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3355\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3356 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3357 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3358} 3359 3360 3361\message{glyphs,} 3362% and logos. 3363 3364% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3365\def\@{\char64 } 3366\let\atchar=\@ 3367 3368% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3369\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3370\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3371\let\{=\lbracechar 3372\let\}=\rbracechar 3373 3374% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3375\let\comma = , 3376 3377% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3378% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3379\let\, = \ptexc 3380\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3381\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3382\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3383\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3384\let\udotaccent = \d 3385 3386% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3387% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3388\def\questiondown{?`} 3389\def\exclamdown{!`} 3390\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3391\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3392 3393% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3394\def\imacro{i} 3395\def\jmacro{j} 3396\def\dotless#1{% 3397 \def\temp{#1}% 3398 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3399 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3400 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3401 \fi\fi 3402} 3403 3404% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3405% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3406% 3407\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3408 3409% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3410% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3411% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3412% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3413% \scriptscriptstyle). 3414% 3415\def\LaTeX{% 3416 L\kern-.36em 3417 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3418 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3419 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3420 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3421 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3422 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3423 \else 3424 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3425 \switchtolllsize A% 3426 \fi 3427 }% 3428 \vss 3429 }}% 3430 \kern-.15em 3431 \TeX 3432} 3433 3434% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3435% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3436% but safer, and can't hurt. 3437\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3438\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3439% 3440\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3441\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3442\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3443\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3444 3445% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3446% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3447% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3448% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3449% whichever is larger. 3450% 3451\def\dots{% 3452 \leavevmode 3453 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3454 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3455 \dimen0 = \wd0 3456 \else 3457 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3458 \fi 3459 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3460 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3461 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3462 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3463 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3464 }% 3465} 3466 3467% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3468% 3469\def\enddots{% 3470 \dots 3471 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3472} 3473 3474% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3475% 3476% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3477% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3478% 3479\def\point{$\star$} 3480\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3481\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3482\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3483\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3484\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3485 3486% The @error{} command. 3487% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3488% 3489\newbox\errorbox 3490% 3491{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3492\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3493% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3494\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3495% 3496\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3497 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3498 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3499 \vbox{% 3500 \hrule height\dimen2 3501 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3502 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3503 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3504 \hrule height\dimen2} 3505 \hfil} 3506% 3507\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3508 3509% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3510% 3511\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3512 3513% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3514% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3515% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3516% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3517% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3518% 3519% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3520% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3521% font height. 3522% 3523% feymr - regular 3524% feymo - slanted 3525% feybr - bold 3526% feybo - bold slanted 3527% 3528% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3529% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3530% Hmm. 3531% 3532% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3533% Hope not. 3534% 3535% 3536\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3537\def\eurofont{% 3538 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3539 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3540 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3541 % font installed. 3542 % 3543 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3544 % that to the current nominal size. 3545 % 3546 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3547 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3548 % 3549 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3550 % 3551 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3552 % bold: 3553 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3554 \else 3555 % regular: 3556 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3557 \fi 3558 \thiseurofont 3559} 3560 3561% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3562% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3563% the redefinition. 3564% 3565% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3566\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3567\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3568\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3569\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3570% 3571\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3572\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3573\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3574\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3575\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3576\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3577\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3578\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3579% 3580% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3581% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3582% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3583% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3584% 3585% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3586% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3587% the same EC font. 3588\def\ogonek#1{{% 3589 \def\temp{#1}% 3590 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3591 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3592 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3593 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3594 \else 3595 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3596 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3597 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3598 \fi 3599 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3600 }% 3601} 3602\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3603\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3604\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3605\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3606% 3607% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3608% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3609% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3610% package and follow the same conventions. 3611% 3612\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3613\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3614% 3615\def\etcfont#1{% 3616 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3617 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3618 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3619 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3620 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3621 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3622 \ifmonospace 3623 % typewriter: 3624 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3625 \else 3626 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3627 % bold: 3628 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3629 \else 3630 % regular: 3631 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3632 \fi 3633 \fi 3634 \thisecfont 3635} 3636 3637% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3638% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3639% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3640% 3641\def\registeredsymbol{% 3642 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3643 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3644 }$% 3645} 3646 3647% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3648% 3649\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3650 3651% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3652% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3653% so we'll define it if necessary. 3654% 3655\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3656\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3657\fi 3658 3659% Quotes. 3660\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3661\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3662\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3663\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3664 3665 3666\message{page headings,} 3667 3668\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3669\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3670 3671% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3672\newif\ifseenauthor 3673\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3674 3675% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3676% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3677\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3678 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3679 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3680 after the title page.}}% 3681\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3682 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3683 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3684 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3685 3686\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3687 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3688 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3689 3690\envdef\titlepage{% 3691 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3692 \begingroup 3693 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3694 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3695 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3696 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3697 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3698 % 3699 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3700 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3701 \let\oldpage = \page 3702 \def\page{% 3703 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3704 \finishtitlepage 3705 \fi 3706 \let\page = \oldpage 3707 \page 3708 \null 3709 }% 3710} 3711 3712\def\Etitlepage{% 3713 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3714 \finishtitlepage 3715 \fi 3716 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3717 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3718 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3719 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3720 \oldpage 3721 \endgroup 3722 % 3723 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3724 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3725 \HEADINGSon 3726} 3727 3728\def\finishtitlepage{% 3729 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3730 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3731 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3732} 3733 3734% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3735% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3736% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3737% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3738% 3739\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3740 \rm 3741 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3742 \parindent=0pt 3743 \tolerance=5000 3744 \ptexraggedright 3745} 3746 3747% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3748 3749\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3750\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3751 3752\parseargdef\title{% 3753 \checkenv\titlepage 3754 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3755 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3756 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3757 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3758} 3759 3760\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3761 \checkenv\titlepage 3762 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3763} 3764 3765% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3766% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3767% 3768\parseargdef\author{% 3769 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3770 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3771 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3772 \else 3773 \checkenv\titlepage 3774 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3775 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3776 \fi 3777} 3778 3779 3780% Set up page headings and footings. 3781 3782\let\thispage=\folio 3783 3784\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3785\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3786\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3787\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3788 3789% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3790\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3791 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3792\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3793 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3794\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3795 3796% Commands to set those variables. 3797% For example, this is what @headings on does 3798% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3799% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3800% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3801% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3802 3803 3804\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3805\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3806\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3807\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3808 3809\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3810\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3811\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3812\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3813 3814\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3815 3816\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3817\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3818\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3819\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3820 3821\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3822\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3823\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3824 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3825 % 3826 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3827 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3828 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3829 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3830} 3831 3832\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3833 3834% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3835% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3836% 3837% The same set of arguments for: 3838% 3839% @oddheadingmarks 3840% @evenfootingmarks 3841% @oddfootingmarks 3842% @everyheadingmarks 3843% @everyfootingmarks 3844 3845% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3846% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3847% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3848% 3849\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3850\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3851\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3852\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3853\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3854 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3855\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3856 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3857% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3858\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3859 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3860 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3861} 3862 3863\everyheadingmarks bottom 3864\everyfootingmarks bottom 3865 3866% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3867% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3868% @headings off turns them off. 3869% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3870% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3871% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3872% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3873% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3874% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3875 3876\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3877 3878\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3879 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3880 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3881} 3882 3883\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3884\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3885 3886% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3887% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3888% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3889% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3890% edge of all pages. 3891\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3892\global\pageno=1 3893\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3894\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3895\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3896\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3897\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3898} 3899\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3900 3901% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3902% page number on top right. 3903\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3904\global\pageno=1 3905\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3906\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3907\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3908\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3909\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3910} 3911\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3912 3913\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3914\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3915\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3916\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3917\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3918\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3919\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3920\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3921} 3922 3923\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3924\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3925\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3926\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3927\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3928\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3929\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3930} 3931 3932% Subroutines used in generating headings 3933% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3934% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3935% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3936\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3937\def\today{% 3938 \number\day\space 3939 \ifcase\month 3940 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3941 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3942 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3943 \fi 3944 \space\number\year} 3945\fi 3946 3947% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3948% It generates no output of its own. 3949\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3950\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3951 3952 3953\message{tables,} 3954% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3955 3956% default indentation of table text 3957\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3958% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3959\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3960% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3961\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3962 3963% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3964\newdimen\itemmax 3965 3966% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3967% these defs. 3968% They also define \itemindex 3969% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3970 3971\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3972 3973\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3974 3975\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3976\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3977 3978\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3979 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3980 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3981 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3982 \itemindex{#1}% 3983 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3984 % 3985 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3986 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3987 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3988 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3989 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3990 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3991 % 3992 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3993 % but leave it ragged-right. 3994 \begingroup 3995 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3996 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3997 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3998 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3999 \endgroup 4000 % 4001 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4002 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4003 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4004 % 4005 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4006 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4007 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4008 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4009 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4010 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4011 % 4012 \penalty 10001 4013 \endgroup 4014 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4015 \else 4016 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4017 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4018 \noindent 4019 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4020 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4021 % eventually be printed. 4022 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4023 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4024 \unhbox0 4025 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4026 \endgroup 4027 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4028 \fi 4029} 4030 4031\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4032\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4033 4034% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4035\envdef\table{% 4036 \let\itemindex\gobble 4037 \tablecheck{table}% 4038} 4039\envdef\ftable{% 4040 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4041 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4042} 4043\envdef\vtable{% 4044 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4045 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4046} 4047\def\tablecheck#1{% 4048 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4049 \endgroup 4050 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4051 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4052 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4053 \else 4054 \let\next\tablex 4055 \fi 4056 \next 4057} 4058\def\tablex#1{% 4059 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4060 \parsearg\tabley 4061} 4062\def\tabley#1{% 4063 {% 4064 \makevalueexpandable 4065 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4066 \expandafter 4067 }\temp \endtablez 4068} 4069\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4070 \aboveenvbreak 4071 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4072 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4073 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4074 \itemmax=\tableindent 4075 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4076 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4077 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4078 \parindent = 0pt 4079 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4080 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4081 \let\item = \internalBitem 4082 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4083} 4084\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4085\let\Eftable\Etable 4086\let\Evtable\Etable 4087\let\Eitemize\Etable 4088\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4089 4090% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4091 4092\newcount \itemno 4093 4094\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4095 4096\def\doitemize#1{% 4097 \aboveenvbreak 4098 \itemmax=\itemindent 4099 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4100 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4101 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4102 \parindent=0pt 4103 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4104 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4105 % 4106 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4107 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4108 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4109 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4110 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4111 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4112 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4113 % 4114 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4115 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4116 % 4117 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4118} 4119 4120% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4121% 4122\def\itemizeitem{% 4123 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4124 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4125 {% 4126 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4127 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4128 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4129 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4130 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4131 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4132 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4133 % that's the theory. 4134 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4135 \noindent 4136 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4137 % 4138 \ifinner\else 4139 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4140 \fi 4141 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4142 % @itemize looks awful there. 4143 }% 4144 \flushcr 4145} 4146 4147% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4148% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4149% 4150\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4151 4152% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4153% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4154% argument is the same as `1'. 4155% 4156\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4157\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4158 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4159 \def\thearg{#1}% 4160 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4161 % 4162 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4163 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4164 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4165 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4166 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4167 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4168 \ifx\rest\empty 4169 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4170 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4171 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4172 % not equal to itself. 4173 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4174 % 4175 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4176 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4177 % 4178 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4179 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4180 \else 4181 % It's a letter. 4182 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4183 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4184 \else 4185 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4186 \fi 4187 \fi 4188 \else 4189 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4190 \numericenumerate 4191 \fi 4192} 4193 4194% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4195% given in \thearg. 4196% 4197\def\numericenumerate{% 4198 \itemno = \thearg 4199 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4200} 4201 4202% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4203\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4204 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4205 \startenumeration{% 4206 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4207 \ifnum\itemno=0 4208 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4209 alphabet}% 4210 \fi 4211 \char\lccode\itemno 4212 }% 4213} 4214 4215% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4216\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4217 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4218 \startenumeration{% 4219 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4220 \ifnum\itemno=0 4221 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4222 alphabet} 4223 \fi 4224 \char\uccode\itemno 4225 }% 4226} 4227 4228% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4229% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4230% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4231% 4232\def\startenumeration#1{% 4233 \advance\itemno by -1 4234 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4235} 4236 4237% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4238% to @enumerate. 4239% 4240\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4241\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4242\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4243\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4244 4245 4246% @multitable macros 4247% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4248% 4249% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4250% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4251% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4252% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4253 4254% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4255 4256% To make preamble: 4257% 4258% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4259% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4260% @item ... 4261% 4262% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4263% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4264% columns as desired. 4265 4266 4267% Or use a template: 4268% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4269% @item ... 4270% using the widest term desired in each column. 4271 4272% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4273% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4274% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4275% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4276 4277% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4278% if they are. 4279 4280% Sample multitable: 4281 4282% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4283% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4284% @item 4285% first col stuff 4286% @tab 4287% second col stuff 4288% @tab 4289% third col 4290% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4291% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4292% 4293% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4294% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4295% @end multitable 4296 4297% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4298% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4299% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4300% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4301% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4302% to baseline. 4303% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4304% 4305\newskip\multitableparskip 4306\newskip\multitableparindent 4307\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4308\newskip\multitablelinespace 4309\multitableparskip=0pt 4310\multitableparindent=6pt 4311\multitablecolspace=12pt 4312\multitablelinespace=0pt 4313 4314% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4315% 4316\let\endsetuptable\relax 4317\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4318\let\columnfractions\relax 4319\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4320\newif\ifsetpercent 4321 4322% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4323% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4324% 4325\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4326 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4327 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4328 \setuptable 4329} 4330 4331\newcount\colcount 4332\def\setuptable#1{% 4333 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4334 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4335 \let\go = \relax 4336 \else 4337 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4338 \global\setpercenttrue 4339 \else 4340 \ifsetpercent 4341 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4342 \else 4343 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4344 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4345 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4346 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4347 \fi 4348 \fi 4349 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4350 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4351 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4352 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4353 \else 4354 \let\go = \setuptable 4355 \fi% 4356 \fi 4357 \go 4358} 4359 4360% multitable-only commands. 4361% 4362% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4363% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4364% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4365% undo it ourselves. 4366\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4367\def\headitem{% 4368 \checkenv\multitable 4369 \crcr 4370 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4371 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4372 \the\everytab % for the first item 4373}% 4374% 4375% default for tables with no headings. 4376\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4377% 4378% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4379% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4380% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4381% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4382\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4383 4384% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4385% 4386\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4387% 4388\envdef\multitable{% 4389 \vskip\parskip 4390 \startsavinginserts 4391 % 4392 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4393 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4394 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4395 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4396 \def\item{\crcr}% 4397 % 4398 \tolerance=9500 4399 \hbadness=9500 4400 \setmultitablespacing 4401 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4402 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4403 \overfullrule=0pt 4404 \global\colcount=0 4405 % 4406 \everycr = {% 4407 \noalign{% 4408 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4409 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4410 % 4411 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4412 \checkinserts 4413 % 4414 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4415 \headitemcrhook 4416 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4417 }% 4418 }% 4419 % 4420 \parsearg\domultitable 4421} 4422\def\domultitable#1{% 4423 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4424 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4425 % 4426 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4427 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4428 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4429 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4430 \halign\bgroup &% 4431 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4432 \multistrut 4433 \vtop{% 4434 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4435 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4436 % 4437 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4438 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4439 % the first one. 4440 % 4441 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4442 % to the width of each template entry. 4443 % 4444 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4445 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4446 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4447 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4448 % 4449 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4450 \rightskip=0pt 4451 \ifnum\colcount=1 4452 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4453 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4454 \else 4455 \ifsetpercent \else 4456 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4457 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4458 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4459 \fi 4460 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4461 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4462 \fi 4463 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4464 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4465 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4466 % For example: 4467 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4468 % @item @code{#} 4469 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4470 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4471 % marking characters. 4472 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4473 }\cr 4474} 4475\def\Emultitable{% 4476 \crcr 4477 \egroup % end the \halign 4478 \global\setpercentfalse 4479} 4480 4481\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4482 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4483 % 4484 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4485 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4486 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4487 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4488\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4489\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4490\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4491\fi 4492% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4493% table. If not, do nothing. 4494% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4495\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4496\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4497\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4498 % than skip between lines in the table. 4499\fi% 4500\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4501\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4502\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4503 % than skip between lines in the table. 4504\fi} 4505 4506 4507\message{conditionals,} 4508 4509% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4510% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4511% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4512% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4513% attempt to close an environment group. 4514% 4515\def\makecond#1{% 4516 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4517 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4518} 4519\makecond{iftex} 4520\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4521\makecond{ifnothtml} 4522\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4523\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4524\makecond{ifnotxml} 4525 4526% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4527% 4528\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4529\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4530\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4531\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4532\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4533\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4534\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4535\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4536\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4537\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4538\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4539\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4540\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4541 4542% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4543% 4544% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4545\newcount\doignorecount 4546 4547\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4548 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4549 \obeylines 4550 \catcode`\@ = \other 4551 \catcode`\{ = \other 4552 \catcode`\} = \other 4553 % 4554 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4555 \spaceisspace 4556 % 4557 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4558 \doignorecount = 0 4559 % 4560 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4561 \dodoignore{#1}% 4562} 4563 4564{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4565 \obeylines % 4566 % 4567 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4568 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4569 % 4570 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4571 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4572 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4573 % 4574 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4575 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4576 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4577 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4578 % 4579 % And now expand that command. 4580 \doignoretext ^^M% 4581 }% 4582} 4583 4584\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4585 \def\temp{#1}% 4586 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4587 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4588 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4589 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4590 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4591 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4592 \fi 4593 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4594} 4595 4596% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4597% 4598\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4599 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4600 \let\next\enddoignore 4601 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4602 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4603 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4604 \fi 4605 \next 4606} 4607 4608% Finish off ignored text. 4609{ \obeylines% 4610 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4611 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4612 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4613 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4614} 4615 4616 4617% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4618% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4619% 4620% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4621% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4622% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4623% didn't need it. 4624% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4625% 4626\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4627\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4628 {% 4629 \makevalueexpandable 4630 \def\temp{#2}% 4631 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4632 \ifx\temp\empty 4633 \next{}% 4634 \else 4635 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4636 \fi 4637 }% 4638} 4639% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4640\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4641 4642% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4643% 4644\parseargdef\clear{% 4645 {% 4646 \makevalueexpandable 4647 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4648 }% 4649} 4650 4651% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4652\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4653\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4654{ 4655 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4656 % 4657 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4658 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4659 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4660 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4661 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4662 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4663 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4664 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4665 } 4666} 4667 4668% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4669% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4670% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4671% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4672% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4673% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4674% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4675% 4676% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* 4677% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr 4678% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's 4679% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. 4680% 4681\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4682 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4683 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4684 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4685 \else 4686 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4687 \fi 4688} 4689 4690% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4691% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4692% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4693% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4694% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4695% 4696% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4697\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4698 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4699 \noexpand\value{#1}% 4700 \else 4701 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4702 \fi 4703} 4704 4705% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4706% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4707\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4708 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4709 ZZZZZZZ 4710 \else 4711 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4712 \fi 4713} 4714 4715% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4716% with @set. 4717% 4718% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4719% \makecond and then redefine. 4720% 4721\makecond{ifset} 4722\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4723\def\doifset#1#2{% 4724 {% 4725 \makevalueexpandable 4726 \let\next=\empty 4727 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4728 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4729 \fi 4730 \expandafter 4731 }\next 4732} 4733\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4734 4735% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4736% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4737% 4738% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4739% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4740% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4741% 4742\makecond{ifclear} 4743\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4744\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4745 4746% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4747% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4748% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4749% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4750% 4751\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4752\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4753% 4754\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4755 \makevalueexpandable 4756 \let\next=\empty 4757 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4758 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4759 \fi 4760 \expandafter 4761 }\next 4762} 4763\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4764 4765% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4766\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4767\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4768 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4769\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4770 4771% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4772% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4773\set txicommandconditionals 4774 4775% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4776% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4777\let\dircategory=\comment 4778 4779% @defininfoenclose. 4780\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4781 4782 4783\message{indexing,} 4784% Index generation facilities 4785 4786% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4787% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4788\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4789 4790% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4791% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4792% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4793% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4794% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4795% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4796% for the sake of vms. 4797% 4798\def\newindex#1{% 4799 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4800 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4801 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4802} 4803 4804% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4805% 4806\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4807 4808% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4809% 4810\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4811% 4812\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4813 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4814 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4815 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4816} 4817 4818% The default indices: 4819\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4820\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4821\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4822\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4823\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4824\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4825 4826 4827% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4828% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4829% 4830% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4831% inside @code. 4832% 4833\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4834\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4835 4836% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4837% #3 the target index (bar). 4838\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4839 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4840 % redefine \fooindfile: 4841 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4842 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4843 % redefine \fooindex: 4844 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4845} 4846 4847% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4848% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4849% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4850 4851\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4852\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4853 4854% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4855\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4856\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4857 4858 4859% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent 4860% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4861% 4862\def\indexdummies{% 4863 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4864 \definedummyletter\@% 4865 \definedummyletter\ % 4866 % 4867 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 4868 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 4869 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 4870 % 4871 % Do the redefinitions. 4872 \definedummies 4873} 4874 4875% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character. 4876% 4877\def\atdummies{% 4878 \definedummyletter\@% 4879 \definedummyletter\ % 4880 \definedummyletter\{% 4881 \definedummyletter\}% 4882 % 4883 % Do the redefinitions. 4884 \definedummies 4885 \otherbackslash 4886} 4887 4888% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4889% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4890% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4891% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4892% from whatever follows. 4893% 4894% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4895% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4896% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4897% 4898% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4899% space. 4900% 4901\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4902\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4903\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4904 4905% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent 4906% the expansion of commands. 4907% 4908\def\definedummies{% 4909 % 4910 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4911 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4912 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4913 \commondummiesnofonts 4914 % 4915 \definedummyletter\_% 4916 \definedummyletter\-% 4917 % 4918 % Non-English letters. 4919 \definedummyword\AA 4920 \definedummyword\AE 4921 \definedummyword\DH 4922 \definedummyword\L 4923 \definedummyword\O 4924 \definedummyword\OE 4925 \definedummyword\TH 4926 \definedummyword\aa 4927 \definedummyword\ae 4928 \definedummyword\dh 4929 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4930 \definedummyword\l 4931 \definedummyword\o 4932 \definedummyword\oe 4933 \definedummyword\ordf 4934 \definedummyword\ordm 4935 \definedummyword\questiondown 4936 \definedummyword\ss 4937 \definedummyword\th 4938 % 4939 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4940 \definedummyword\bf 4941 \definedummyword\gtr 4942 \definedummyword\hat 4943 \definedummyword\less 4944 \definedummyword\sf 4945 \definedummyword\sl 4946 \definedummyword\tclose 4947 \definedummyword\tt 4948 % 4949 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4950 \definedummyword\TeX 4951 % 4952 % Assorted special characters. 4953 \definedummyword\atchar 4954 \definedummyword\arrow 4955 \definedummyword\bullet 4956 \definedummyword\comma 4957 \definedummyword\copyright 4958 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4959 \definedummyword\dots 4960 \definedummyword\enddots 4961 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4962 \definedummyword\equiv 4963 \definedummyword\error 4964 \definedummyword\euro 4965 \definedummyword\expansion 4966 \definedummyword\geq 4967 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4968 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4969 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4970 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4971 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4972 \definedummyword\leq 4973 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4974 \definedummyword\minus 4975 \definedummyword\ogonek 4976 \definedummyword\pounds 4977 \definedummyword\point 4978 \definedummyword\print 4979 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4980 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4981 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4982 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4983 \definedummyword\quoteright 4984 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4985 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4986 \definedummyword\result 4987 \definedummyword\sub 4988 \definedummyword\sup 4989 \definedummyword\textdegree 4990 % 4991 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4992 \macrolist 4993 \let\value\dummyvalue 4994 % 4995 \normalturnoffactive 4996} 4997 4998% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4999% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 5000% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 5001% 5002\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 5003 % Control letters and accents. 5004 \commondummyletter\!% 5005 \commondummyaccent\"% 5006 \commondummyaccent\'% 5007 \commondummyletter\*% 5008 \commondummyaccent\,% 5009 \commondummyletter\.% 5010 \commondummyletter\/% 5011 \commondummyletter\:% 5012 \commondummyaccent\=% 5013 \commondummyletter\?% 5014 \commondummyaccent\^% 5015 \commondummyaccent\`% 5016 \commondummyaccent\~% 5017 \commondummyword\u 5018 \commondummyword\v 5019 \commondummyword\H 5020 \commondummyword\dotaccent 5021 \commondummyword\ogonek 5022 \commondummyword\ringaccent 5023 \commondummyword\tieaccent 5024 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 5025 \commondummyword\udotaccent 5026 \commondummyword\dotless 5027 % 5028 % Texinfo font commands. 5029 \commondummyword\b 5030 \commondummyword\i 5031 \commondummyword\r 5032 \commondummyword\sansserif 5033 \commondummyword\sc 5034 \commondummyword\slanted 5035 \commondummyword\t 5036 % 5037 % Commands that take arguments. 5038 \commondummyword\abbr 5039 \commondummyword\acronym 5040 \commondummyword\anchor 5041 \commondummyword\cite 5042 \commondummyword\code 5043 \commondummyword\command 5044 \commondummyword\dfn 5045 \commondummyword\dmn 5046 \commondummyword\email 5047 \commondummyword\emph 5048 \commondummyword\env 5049 \commondummyword\file 5050 \commondummyword\image 5051 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5052 \commondummyword\inforef 5053 \commondummyword\kbd 5054 \commondummyword\key 5055 \commondummyword\math 5056 \commondummyword\option 5057 \commondummyword\pxref 5058 \commondummyword\ref 5059 \commondummyword\samp 5060 \commondummyword\strong 5061 \commondummyword\tie 5062 \commondummyword\U 5063 \commondummyword\uref 5064 \commondummyword\url 5065 \commondummyword\var 5066 \commondummyword\verb 5067 \commondummyword\w 5068 \commondummyword\xref 5069} 5070 5071% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}. 5072\newif\ifusebracesinindexes 5073 5074\let\indexlbrace\relax 5075\let\indexrbrace\relax 5076 5077{\catcode`\@=0 5078\catcode`\\=13 5079 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5080} 5081 5082{ 5083\catcode`\<=13 5084\catcode`\-=13 5085\catcode`\`=13 5086 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5087 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5088 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5089 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5090 \let`=\empty 5091 \fi 5092 % 5093 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5094 \backslashdisappear 5095 \fi 5096 % 5097 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5098 \def-{}% 5099 \fi 5100 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5101 \def<{}% 5102 \fi 5103 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5104 \def\@{}% 5105 \fi 5106 } 5107 5108 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5109 \useindexbackslash 5110 \let-\normaldash 5111 \let<\normalless 5112 \def\@{@}% 5113 } 5114} 5115 5116 5117% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5118% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5119% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5120% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5121% 5122\def\indexnofonts{% 5123 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5124 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5125 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5126 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5127 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5128 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5129 \commondummiesnofonts 5130 % 5131 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5132 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5133 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5134 %\let\tt=\asis 5135 % 5136 \def\ { }% 5137 \def\@{@}% 5138 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5139 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5140 % 5141 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5142 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5143 \let\lbracechar\{% 5144 \let\rbracechar\}% 5145 % 5146 % Non-English letters. 5147 \def\AA{AA}% 5148 \def\AE{AE}% 5149 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5150 \def\L{L}% 5151 \def\OE{OE}% 5152 \def\O{O}% 5153 \def\TH{TH}% 5154 \def\aa{aa}% 5155 \def\ae{ae}% 5156 \def\dh{dzz}% 5157 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5158 \def\l{l}% 5159 \def\oe{oe}% 5160 \def\ordf{a}% 5161 \def\ordm{o}% 5162 \def\o{o}% 5163 \def\questiondown{?}% 5164 \def\ss{ss}% 5165 \def\th{th}% 5166 % 5167 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5168 \def\TeX{TeX}% 5169 % 5170 % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a 5171 % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. 5172 \defglyph\atchar{@}% 5173 \defglyph\arrow{->}% 5174 \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% 5175 \defglyph\comma{,}% 5176 \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% 5177 \defglyph\dots{...}% 5178 \defglyph\enddots{...}% 5179 \defglyph\equiv{==}% 5180 \defglyph\error{error}% 5181 \defglyph\euro{euro}% 5182 \defglyph\expansion{==>}% 5183 \defglyph\geq{>=}% 5184 \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% 5185 \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% 5186 \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% 5187 \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% 5188 \defglyph\leq{<=}% 5189 \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% 5190 \defglyph\minus{-}% 5191 \defglyph\point{.}% 5192 \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% 5193 \defglyph\print{-|}% 5194 \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% 5195 \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% 5196 \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% 5197 \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% 5198 \defglyph\quoteright{'}% 5199 \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% 5200 \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% 5201 \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% 5202 \defglyph\result{=>}% 5203 \defglyph\textdegree{o}% 5204 % 5205 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5206 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5207 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5208 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5209 % that starts with \. 5210 % 5211 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5212 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5213 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5214 % 5215 \macrolist 5216 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5217} 5218\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above 5219 5220 5221 5222 5223\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 5224 5225% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 5226% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5227\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 5228 5229% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 5230% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 5231% TODO: Two-level index? Operation index? 5232 5233% Workhorse for all indexes. 5234% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 5235% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 5236% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 5237% 5238\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 5239 \iflinks 5240 {% 5241 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5242 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 5243 \toks0 = {#2}% 5244 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 5245 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 5246 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 5247 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 5248 \fi 5249 % 5250 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5251 % 5252 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 5253 }% 5254 \fi 5255} 5256 5257% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5258\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5259\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5260 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5261 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5262 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5263 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5264 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5265 % Open the file 5266 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5267 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5268 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5269 % preceding skips. 5270 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5271\fi} 5272\def\indexisfl{fl} 5273 5274% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in 5275% the index files. 5276\let\indexbackslash=\relax 5277{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 5278 @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}} 5279} 5280 5281% Definition for writing index entry text. 5282\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}% 5283 5284% Definition for writing index entry sort key. Should occur at the at 5285% the beginning of the index entry, like 5286% @cindex @sortas{september} \september 5287% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way 5288% to remove space before it. 5289{ 5290\catcode`\-=13 5291\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5292 \begingroup 5293 \indexnonalnumreappear 5294 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5295\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5296 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5297} 5298 5299 5300% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file. 5301% 5302\def\dosubindwrite{% 5303 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 5304 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5305 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 5306 \fi 5307 % 5308 % Remember, we are within a group. 5309 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 5310 \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 5311 % as is; and it will print as backslash. 5312 % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex. 5313 % 5314 % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all 5315 % font commands turned off. 5316 {\indexnofonts 5317 \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}% 5318 \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}% 5319 \let\{=\lbracechar 5320 \let\}=\rbracechar 5321 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5322 \xdef\indexsortkey{}% 5323 \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas 5324 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% 5325 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas 5326 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty 5327 \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}% 5328 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5329 \fi 5330 }% 5331 % 5332 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5333 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5334 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5335 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5336 % sorted result. 5337 \edef\temp{% 5338 \write\writeto{% 5339 \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 5340 }% 5341 \temp 5342} 5343\newbox\dummybox % used above 5344 5345% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5346% 5347% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5348% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5349% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5350% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5351% sequences like this: 5352% @end defun 5353% @tindex whatever 5354% @defun ... 5355% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5356% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5357% the previous defun. 5358% 5359% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5360% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5361% 5362% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5363% 5364% But wait, there is a catch there: 5365% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5366% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5367% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5368% representation of the skip. 5369% 5370% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5371% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5372% 5373\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5374% 5375\newskip\whatsitskip 5376\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5377% 5378% ..., ready, GO: 5379% 5380\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5381 #1% 5382 \else 5383 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5384 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5385 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5386 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5387 % 5388 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5389 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5390 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5391 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5392 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5393 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5394 \else 5395 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5396 \fi 5397 % 5398 #1% 5399 % 5400 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5401 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5402 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5403 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5404 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5405 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5406 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5407 % @vindex index-whatever 5408 % Description. 5409 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5410 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5411 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5412 \else 5413 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5414 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5415 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5416 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5417 \fi 5418\fi} 5419 5420% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5421% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5422% or 5423% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5424% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5425% containing these kinds of lines: 5426% \initial {c} 5427% before the first topic whose initial is c 5428% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5429% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5430% \primary {topic} 5431% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5432% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5433% for each subtopic. 5434 5435% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5436% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5437 5438\def\findex {\fnindex} 5439\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5440\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5441\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5442\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5443\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5444 5445\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 5446{\obeylines % 5447\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 5448\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 5449 5450% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5451 5452% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5453% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5454% 5455\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5456 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5457 % 5458 \smallfonts \rm 5459 \tolerance = 9500 5460 \plainfrenchspacing 5461 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5462 % 5463 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5464 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 5465 % \initial {@} 5466 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 5467 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 5468 \catcode`\@ = 12 5469 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5470 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5471 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5472 \ifeof 1 5473 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5474 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5475 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5476 % there is some text. 5477 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5478 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5479 \else 5480 \catcode`\\ = 0 5481 % 5482 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5483 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5484 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5485 \read 1 to \thisline 5486 \ifeof 1 5487 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5488 \else 5489 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 5490 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 5491 % to make right now. 5492 \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}% 5493 \let\indexlbrace\{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces 5494 \let\indexrbrace\} % used in the sort key. 5495 \begindoublecolumns 5496 \let\entrywidowpenalty=\indexwidowpenalty 5497 % 5498 % Read input from the index file line by line. 5499 \loopdo 5500 \ifeof1 5501 \let\firsttoken\relax 5502 \else 5503 \read 1 to \nextline 5504 \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}% 5505 \act 5506 \fi 5507 \thisline 5508 % 5509 \ifeof1\else 5510 \let\thisline\nextline 5511 \repeat 5512 %% 5513 \enddoublecolumns 5514 \fi 5515 \fi 5516 \closein 1 5517\endgroup} 5518 5519\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken} 5520\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1} 5521 5522\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx} 5523\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next} 5524 5525% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5526% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5527 5528{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5529\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5530\catcode`\$=3 5531\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5532 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5533 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5534 % for these characters. 5535 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5536 \let\\=\indexbackslash 5537 % 5538 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5539 \catcode`\/=13 5540 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5541 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5542 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5543 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5544 \def\_{% 5545 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5546 \def|{$\vert$}% 5547 \def<{$\less$}% 5548 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5549 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5550}} 5551 5552\def\initial{% 5553 \bgroup 5554 \initialglyphs 5555 \initialx 5556} 5557 5558\def\initialx#1{% 5559 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5560 \removelastskip 5561 % 5562 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5563 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5564 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5565 \nobreak 5566 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5567 \penalty -300 5568 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5569 % 5570 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5571 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5572 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5573 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5574 % 5575 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5576 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5577 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5578 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5579 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5580 % \leftline creates. 5581 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5582 \nobreak 5583 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5584 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5585} 5586 5587\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5588\entryrightmargin=0pt 5589 5590% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5591% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5592% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5593% 5594\def\entry{% 5595 \begingroup 5596 % 5597 % For pdfTeX and XeTeX. 5598 % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 5599 % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks 5600 % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertindexentrybox. 5601 \let\domark\relax 5602 % 5603 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5604 % affect previous text. 5605 \par 5606 % 5607 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5608 \parskip = 0in 5609 % 5610 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5611 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5612 % titles, for instance. 5613 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5614 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5615 % 5616 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5617 \afterassignment\doentry 5618 \let\temp = 5619} 5620\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5621\def\doentry{% 5622 % Save the text of the entry 5623 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5624 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5625 \noindent 5626 \aftergroup\finishentry 5627 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5628 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5629 % with catcodes occurring. 5630} 5631{\catcode`\@=11 5632\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5633 \egroup % end box A 5634 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5635 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA 5636 % #1 is the page number. 5637 % 5638 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5639 % leaders if they are present. 5640 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5641 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5642 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5643 \else 5644 % 5645 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5646 % 5647 \ifpdf 5648 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5649 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5650 \else 5651 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5652 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5653 \else 5654 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5655 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5656 \fi 5657 \fi 5658 \fi 5659 \egroup % end \boxA 5660 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5661 \global\setbox\entryindexbox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}% 5662 \else 5663 \global\setbox\entryindexbox=\vbox\bgroup 5664 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5665 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5666 % 5667 \parindent = 0pt 5668 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5669 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5670 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5671 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5672 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5673 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5674 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5675 % 5676 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5677 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5678 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5679 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5680 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5681 \dimen@i=2.1em 5682 \else 5683 \dimen@i=0em 5684 \fi 5685 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5686 % 5687 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5688 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5689 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5690 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5691 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5692 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5693 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ % Try to split the text roughly evenly 5694 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5695 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5696 % If the entry is too long, use the whole line 5697 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5698 \fi 5699 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5700 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5701 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5702 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5703 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5704 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5705 % 5706 \leftskip = 1em 5707 \parindent = -1em 5708 \fi\fi 5709 \indent % start paragraph 5710 \unhbox\boxA 5711 % 5712 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5713 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5714 % 5715 % Word spacing - no stretch 5716 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5717 % 5718 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5719 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5720 % 5721 \par % format the paragraph 5722 \egroup % The \vbox 5723 \fi 5724 \endgroup 5725 % delay text of entry until after penalty 5726 \bgroup\aftergroup\insertindexentrybox 5727 \entrywidowpenalty 5728}} 5729 5730\newskip\thinshrinkable 5731\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5732 5733\newbox\entryindexbox 5734\def\insertindexentrybox{% 5735 \ourunvbox\entryindexbox 5736} 5737 5738% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box 5739% to the current vertical list. 5740\def\ourunvbox#1{% 5741\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox 5742 % Remove the last box from box #1 5743 \global\setbox#1=\vbox{% 5744 \unvbox#1% 5745 \unskip % remove any glue 5746 \unpenalty 5747 \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox 5748 }% 5749 \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox 5750 \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else 5751 \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box 5752 \nobreak 5753 \fi 5754 \box\delayedbox 5755\egroup 5756} 5757\newbox\delayedbox 5758\newbox\interbox 5759 5760% Default is no penalty 5761\let\entrywidowpenalty\egroup 5762 5763% Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token 5764% after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last 5765% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage 5766% widowed index entries. 5767\long\def\indexwidowpenalty{% 5768 \def\isentry{\entry}% 5769 \ifx\firsttoken\isentry 5770 \else 5771 \penalty 9000 5772 \fi 5773 \egroup % now comes the box added with \aftergroup 5774} 5775 5776% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5777% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5778% the page number to the right. 5779\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5780 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5781 5782 5783\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5784 5785\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5786\def\secondary#1#2{{% 5787 \parfillskip=0in 5788 \parskip=0in 5789 \hangindent=1in 5790 \hangafter=1 5791 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5792 \ifpdf 5793 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5794 \else 5795 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5796 #2 5797 \else 5798 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5799 \fi 5800 \fi 5801 \par 5802}} 5803 5804% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5805% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5806% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5807\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5808 5809\newbox\partialpage 5810\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5811 5812% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark 5813\def\savemarks{% 5814 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }% 5815 \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }% 5816} 5817\newtoks\savedtopmark 5818\newtoks\savedfirstmark 5819 5820% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs. 5821% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material 5822% added while an output routine is active, including 5823% penalties, is saved for after it finishes). The page so far 5824% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away. 5825\def\restoremarks{% 5826 \mark{\the\savedtopmark}% 5827 \bgroup\output = {% 5828 \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE 5829 }abc\eject\egroup 5830 % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page. 5831 \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}% 5832} 5833 5834\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5835 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5836 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5837 % 5838 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5839 \output = {% 5840 % 5841 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5842 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5843 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5844 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5845 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5846 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5847 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5848 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5849 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5850 \fi 5851 % 5852 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5853 % Unvbox the main output page. 5854 \unvbox\PAGE 5855 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5856 }% 5857 \savemarks 5858 }% 5859 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5860 \restoremarks 5861 % 5862 % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order 5863 % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading, 5864 % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output. 5865 % 5866 % 5867 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5868 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5869 % 5870 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5871 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5872 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5873 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5874 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5875 % 5876 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5877 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5878 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5879 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5880 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5881 % 5882 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5883 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5884 % been clobbered. 5885 % 5886 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5887 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5888 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5889 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5890 % 5891 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 5892 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 5893 \vsize = 2\vsize 5894 % 5895 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5896 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5897} 5898 5899% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5900% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5901% 5902\def\doublecolumnout{% 5903 % 5904 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5905 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5906 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5907 % previous page. 5908 \dimen@ = \vsize 5909 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5910 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 5911 % 5912 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5913 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 5914 \onepageout\pagesofar 5915 \unvbox255 5916 \penalty\outputpenalty 5917} 5918% 5919% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5920% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5921\def\pagesofar{% 5922 \unvbox\partialpage 5923 % 5924 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5925 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5926 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5927} 5928 5929 5930% Finished with with double columns. 5931\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5932 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5933 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5934 % following situation: 5935 % 5936 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5937 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5938 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5939 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5940 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5941 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5942 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5943 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5944 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5945 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5946 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5947 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5948 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5949 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5950 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5951 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5952 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5953 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5954 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5955 % 5956 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5957 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5958 \penalty0 5959 % 5960 \output = {% 5961 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5962 \savemarks 5963 \balancecolumns 5964 % 5965 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5966 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5967 % definition right away. 5968 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 5969 }% 5970 \eject 5971 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5972 \restoremarks 5973 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5974 % page break. 5975 \box\balancedcolumns 5976 % 5977 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5978 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5979 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 5980 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 5981 \pagegoal = \vsize 5982} 5983\newbox\balancedcolumns 5984\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5985% 5986% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5987% does the others. 5988\def\balancecolumns{% 5989 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5990 \dimen@ = \ht0 5991 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5992 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5993 \ifdim\dimen@<5\baselineskip 5994 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5995 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5996 \else 5997 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5998 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 5999 \splittopskip = \topskip 6000 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 6001 {% 6002 \vbadness = 10000 6003 \loop 6004 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 6005 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 6006 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 6007 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 6008 \repeat 6009 }% 6010 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 6011 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 6012 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 6013 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 6014 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 6015 % Just split the last of the double column material roughly in half. 6016 \setbox2=\box0 6017 \setbox0 = \vsplit2 to \dimen@ii 6018 \setbox0=\vbox to \dimen@ii {\unvbox0\vfill}% 6019 \setbox2=\vbox to \dimen@ii {\unvbox2\vfill}% 6020 \else 6021 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 6022 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 6023 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 6024 % flush with each other. 6025 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 6026 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 6027 \else 6028 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 6029 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 6030 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 6031 \fi 6032 \fi 6033 \fi 6034 % 6035 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6036} 6037\catcode`\@ = \other 6038 6039 6040\message{sectioning,} 6041% Chapters, sections, etc. 6042 6043% Let's start with @part. 6044\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 6045\def\partzzz#1{% 6046 \chapoddpage 6047 \null 6048 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 6049 \begingroup 6050 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 6051 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 6052 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 6053 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6054 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6055 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6056 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6057 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6058 \chapoddpage 6059 \endgroup 6060} 6061 6062% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6063% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6064% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6065% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6066% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6067\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6068\newcount\chapno 6069\newcount\secno \secno=0 6070\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6071\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6072 6073% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6074\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6075% 6076% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6077% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6078% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6079% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6080% 6081\def\appendixletter{% 6082 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6083 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6084 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6085 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6086 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6087 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6088 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6089 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6090 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6091 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6092 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6093 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6094 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6095 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6096 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6097 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6098 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6099 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6100 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6101 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6102 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6103 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6104 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6105 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6106 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6107 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6108 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6109 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6110 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6111 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6112 \else\char\the\appendixno 6113 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6114 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6115 6116% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6117% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6118% these. @section does likewise. 6119\def\thischapter{} 6120\def\thischapternum{} 6121\def\thischaptername{} 6122\def\thissection{} 6123\def\thissectionnum{} 6124\def\thissectionname{} 6125 6126\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6127\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6128 6129% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6130\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6131\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 6132 6133% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6134\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6135\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 6136 6137% we only have subsub. 6138\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6139% 6140% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6141% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6142\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6143% 6144% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6145% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6146\def\chapheadtype{N} 6147 6148% Choose a heading macro 6149% #1 is heading type 6150% #2 is heading level 6151% #3 is text for heading 6152\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6153 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6154 \absseclevel=#2 6155 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6156 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6157 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6158 \absseclevel = 0 6159 \else 6160 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6161 \absseclevel = 3 6162 \fi 6163 \fi 6164 % The heading type: 6165 \def\headtype{#1}% 6166 \if \headtype U% 6167 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6168 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6169 \fi 6170 \else 6171 % Check for appendix sections: 6172 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6173 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6174 \else 6175 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6176 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6177 \fi\fi 6178 \fi 6179 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6180 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6181 \def\headtype{U}% 6182 \else 6183 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6184 \fi 6185 \fi 6186 % Now print the heading: 6187 \if \headtype U% 6188 \ifcase\absseclevel 6189 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6190 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6191 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6192 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6193 \fi 6194 \else 6195 \if \headtype A% 6196 \ifcase\absseclevel 6197 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6198 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6199 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6200 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6201 \fi 6202 \else 6203 \ifcase\absseclevel 6204 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6205 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6206 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6207 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6208 \fi 6209 \fi 6210 \fi 6211 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6212} 6213 6214% an interface: 6215\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6216\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6217\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6218 6219% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6220% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6221% 6222% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6223% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6224\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6225% 6226\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6227\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6228 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6229 % as an @include file. 6230 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6231 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6232 % 6233 % Used for \float. 6234 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6235 \resetallfloatnos 6236 % 6237 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6238 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6239 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6240 % 6241 % Write the actual heading. 6242 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6243 % 6244 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6245 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6246 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6247 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6248} 6249 6250\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6251% 6252\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6253 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6254 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6255 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6256 \resetallfloatnos 6257 % 6258 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6259 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6260 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6261 % 6262 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6263 % 6264 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6265 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6266 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6267} 6268 6269% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6270\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6271\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6272 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6273 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6274 % 6275 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6276 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6277 \resetallfloatnos 6278 % 6279 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6280 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6281 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6282 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6283 % to be executed, not expanded). 6284 % 6285 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6286 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6287 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6288 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6289 % the toc entries.) 6290 \toks0 = {#1}% 6291 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6292 % 6293 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6294 % 6295 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6296 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6297 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6298} 6299 6300% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6301\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6302 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6303 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6304 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6305} 6306 6307% @top is like @unnumbered. 6308\let\top\unnumbered 6309 6310% Sections. 6311% 6312\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6313\def\seczzz#1{% 6314 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6315 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6316} 6317 6318% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6319\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6320\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6321 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6322 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6323} 6324\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6325 6326% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6327\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6328\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6329 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6330 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6331} 6332 6333% Subsections. 6334% 6335% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6336\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6337\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6338 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6339 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6340} 6341 6342% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6343\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6344\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6345 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6346 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6347 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6348} 6349 6350% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6351\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6352\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6353 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6354 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6355 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6356} 6357 6358% Subsubsections. 6359% 6360% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6361\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6362\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6363 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6364 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6365 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6366} 6367 6368% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6369\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6370\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6371 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6372 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6373 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6374} 6375 6376% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6377\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6378\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6379 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6380 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6381 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6382} 6383 6384% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6385% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6386% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6387\let\section = \numberedsec 6388\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6389\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6390 6391% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6392 6393\def\majorheading{% 6394 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6395 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6396} 6397 6398\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6399\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6400 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6401 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6402 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6403} 6404 6405% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6406\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6407 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6408\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6409 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6410\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6411 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6412 6413% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6414% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6415% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6416 6417% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6418\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6419 6420% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6421\newskip\chapheadingskip 6422 6423% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6424\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6425 6426% Start a new page 6427\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6428 6429% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6430% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6431% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6432% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6433\def\chapoddpage{% 6434 \chappager 6435 \ifodd\pageno \else 6436 \begingroup 6437 \headingsoff 6438 \null 6439 \chappager 6440 \endgroup 6441 \fi 6442} 6443 6444\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6445 6446\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6447\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6448\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6449\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 6450 6451\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6452\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6453\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6454\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 6455\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6456 6457\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6458\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6459\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6460\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 6461\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6462 6463\CHAPPAGon 6464 6465% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6466% 6467% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6468% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6469% Not used for @heading series. 6470% 6471% To test against our argument. 6472\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6473\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6474\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6475% 6476\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6477 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6478 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6479 \fi 6480 % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when 6481 % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but 6482 % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print 6483 % in chapter size. 6484 % 6485 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6486 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6487 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6488 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6489 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6490 % 6491 \def\temptype{#2}% 6492 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6493 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6494 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6495 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6496 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6497 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6498 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6499 \toks0={#1}% 6500 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6501 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6502 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6503 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6504 % commands in some of the translations. 6505 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6506 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6507 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6508 }% 6509 \else 6510 \toks0={#1}% 6511 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6512 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6513 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6514 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6515 % commands in some of the translations. 6516 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6517 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6518 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6519 }% 6520 \fi\fi\fi 6521 % 6522 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6523 % the preceding space. 6524 \safewhatsit\domark 6525 % 6526 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6527 \pchapsepmacro 6528 % 6529 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6530 % between here and the heading. 6531 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6532 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6533 \domark 6534 % 6535 {% 6536 \chapfonts \rm 6537 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6538 % 6539 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6540 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6541 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6542 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6543 % 6544 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6545 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6546 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6547 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6548 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6549 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6550 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6551 \def\toctype{omit}% 6552 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6553 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6554 \def\toctype{app}% 6555 \else 6556 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6557 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6558 \fi\fi\fi 6559 % 6560 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6561 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6562 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6563 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6564 % 6565 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6566 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6567 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6568 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6569 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6570 \donoderef{#2}% 6571 % 6572 % Typeset the actual heading. 6573 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6574 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6575 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6576 }% 6577 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6578 \nobreak 6579} 6580 6581% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6582\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6583\def\centerparameters{% 6584 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6585 \leftskip = \rightskip 6586 \parfillskip = 0pt 6587} 6588 6589 6590% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6591% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6592% 6593\newskip\secheadingskip 6594\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6595 6596% Subsection titles. 6597\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6598\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6599 6600% Subsubsection titles. 6601\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6602\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6603 6604 6605% Print any size, any type, section title. 6606% 6607% #1 is the text of the title, 6608% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6609% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6610% #4 is the section number. 6611% 6612\def\seckeyword{sec} 6613% 6614\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6615 {% 6616 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6617 \def\temptype{#3}% 6618 % 6619 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6620 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6621 % dubious), but not the others. 6622 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6623 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6624 \fi 6625 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6626 % 6627 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6628 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6629 % 6630 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6631 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6632 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6633 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6634 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6635 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6636 \fi 6637 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6638 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6639 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6640 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6641 \toks0={#1}% 6642 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6643 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6644 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6645 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6646 % commands in some of the translations. 6647 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6648 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6649 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6650 }% 6651 \fi 6652 \else 6653 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6654 \toks0={#1}% 6655 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6656 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6657 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6658 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6659 % commands in some of the translations. 6660 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6661 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6662 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6663 }% 6664 \fi 6665 \fi\fi\fi 6666 % 6667 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6668 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6669 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6670 \par 6671 % 6672 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6673 % the preceding space. 6674 \safewhatsit\domark 6675 % 6676 % Insert space above the heading. 6677 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6678 % 6679 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6680 % between here and the heading. 6681 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6682 \domark 6683 % 6684 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6685 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6686 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6687 \def\toctype{unn}% 6688 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6689 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6690 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6691 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 6692 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6693 \def\toctype{omit}% 6694 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6695 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6696 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6697 \def\toctype{app}% 6698 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6699 \else 6700 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6701 \def\toctype{num}% 6702 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6703 \fi\fi\fi 6704 % 6705 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6706 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6707 % 6708 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6709 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6710 \donoderef{#3}% 6711 % 6712 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6713 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6714 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6715 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6716 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6717 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6718 \nobreak 6719 % 6720 % Output the actual section heading. 6721 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6722 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6723 \unhbox0 #1}% 6724 }% 6725 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6726 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6727 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6728 % 6729 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6730 % was followed by glue. 6731 \nobreak 6732 % 6733 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6734 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6735 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6736 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6737 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6738 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6739 \vskip-\parskip 6740 % 6741 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6742 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6743 % and do the needful. 6744 \penalty 10001 6745} 6746 6747 6748\message{toc,} 6749% Table of contents. 6750\newwrite\tocfile 6751 6752% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6753% Called from @chapter, etc. 6754% 6755% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6756% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6757% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6758% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6759% destination to jump to. 6760% 6761% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6762% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6763% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6764% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6765% 6766\newif\iftocfileopened 6767\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6768% 6769\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6770 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6771 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6772 \iftocfileopened\else 6773 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6774 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6775 \fi 6776 % 6777 \iflinks 6778 {\atdummies 6779 \edef\temp{% 6780 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6781 \temp 6782 }% 6783 \fi 6784 \fi 6785 % 6786 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6787 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6788 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6789 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6790 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6791 % `1', and two named `2'. 6792 \ifpdf 6793 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6794 \else 6795 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 6796 \else 6797 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6798 \fi 6799 \fi 6800} 6801 6802 6803% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6804% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6805% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6806% 6807\def\activecatcodes{% 6808 \catcode`\"=\active 6809 \catcode`\$=\active 6810 \catcode`\<=\active 6811 \catcode`\>=\active 6812 \catcode`\\=\active 6813 \catcode`\^=\active 6814 \catcode`\_=\active 6815 \catcode`\|=\active 6816 \catcode`\~=\active 6817} 6818 6819 6820% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6821\def\readtocfile{% 6822 \setupdatafile 6823 \activecatcodes 6824 \input \tocreadfilename 6825} 6826 6827\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6828\newcount\savepageno 6829\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6830 6831% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6832% 6833\def\startcontents#1{% 6834 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6835 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6836 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6837 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6838 \contentsalignmacro 6839 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6840 % 6841 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6842 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6843 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6844 % 6845 \savepageno = \pageno 6846 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6847 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6848 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6849 % 6850 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6851 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6852} 6853 6854% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6855% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6856% 6857\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6858 6859% Normal (long) toc. 6860% 6861\def\contents{% 6862 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6863 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6864 \ifeof 1 \else 6865 \readtocfile 6866 \fi 6867 \vfill \eject 6868 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6869 \ifeof 1 \else 6870 \pdfmakeoutlines 6871 \fi 6872 \closein 1 6873 \endgroup 6874 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6875 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6876} 6877 6878% And just the chapters. 6879\def\summarycontents{% 6880 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6881 % 6882 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6883 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6884 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6885 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6886 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6887 \secfonts 6888 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6889 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6890 \rm 6891 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6892 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6893 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6894 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6895 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6896 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6897 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6898 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6899 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6900 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6901 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6902 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6903 \ifeof 1 \else 6904 \readtocfile 6905 \fi 6906 \closein 1 6907 \vfill \eject 6908 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6909 \endgroup 6910 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6911 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6912} 6913\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6914 6915% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6916% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6917% 6918\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6919 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6920 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6921 % But use \hss just in case. 6922 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6923 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6924 % 6925 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6926 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6927 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6928 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6929 % there are before deciding ... 6930 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6931} 6932 6933% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6934% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6935% The last argument is the page number. 6936% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6937 6938% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6939% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6940% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6941\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6942\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} 6943% 6944% Parts, in the short toc. 6945\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6946 \penalty-300 6947 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6948 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6949} 6950 6951% Chapters, in the main contents. 6952\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6953 6954% Chapters, in the short toc. 6955% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6956\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6957 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6958} 6959 6960% Appendices, in the main contents. 6961% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6962% 6963\def\appendixbox#1{% 6964 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6965 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6966 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6967% 6968\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6969 6970% Unnumbered chapters. 6971\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6972\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6973 6974% Sections. 6975\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6976\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6977\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6978 6979% Subsections. 6980\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6981\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6982\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6983 6984% And subsubsections. 6985\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6986\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6987\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6988 6989% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6990% Same as \defaultparindent. 6991\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6992 6993% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6994% page number. 6995% 6996% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6997% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6998\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6999 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 7000 \begingroup 7001 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 7002 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 7003 \chapentryfonts 7004 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7005 \endgroup 7006 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 7007} 7008 7009\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7010 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 7011 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7012\endgroup} 7013 7014\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7015 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 7016 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7017\endgroup} 7018 7019\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7020 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 7021 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7022\endgroup} 7023 7024% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 7025\let\tocentry = \entry 7026 7027% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 7028\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 7029 7030\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7031\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7032 7033\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 7034\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 7035\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7036\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7037 7038 7039\message{environments,} 7040% @foo ... @end foo. 7041 7042% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 7043% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 7044% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 7045 7046\envdef\tex{% 7047 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 7048 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 7049 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 7050 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 7051 \catcode `\%=14 7052 \catcode `\+=\other 7053 \catcode `\"=\other 7054 \catcode `\|=\other 7055 \catcode `\<=\other 7056 \catcode `\>=\other 7057 \catcode `\`=\other 7058 \catcode `\'=\other 7059 % 7060 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7061 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7062 \mathactive 7063 % 7064 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7065 \let\b=\ptexb 7066 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7067 \let\c=\ptexc 7068 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7069 \let\.=\ptexdot 7070 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7071 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7072 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7073 \let\i=\ptexi 7074 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7075 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7076 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7077 \let\+=\tabalign 7078 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7079 \let\/=\ptexslash 7080 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7081 \let\*=\ptexstar 7082 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7083 \let\t=\ptext 7084 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7085 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7086 % 7087 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7088 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7089 \def\@{@}% 7090} 7091% There is no need to define \Etex. 7092 7093% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7094% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7095% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7096 7097% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7098\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7099 7100% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7101% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7102% have any width. 7103\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7104 7105% This space is always present above and below environments. 7106\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7107 7108% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7109% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7110% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7111% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7112% 7113\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7114 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7115 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7116 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7117 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7118 \endgraf 7119 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7120 \removelastskip 7121 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7122 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7123 % often leads into it. 7124 \penalty100 7125 \fi 7126 \vskip\envskipamount 7127 \fi 7128 \fi 7129}} 7130 7131\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7132 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7133 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7134 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7135 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7136 \endgraf 7137 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7138 \removelastskip 7139 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7140 % or better ... 7141 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7142 \vskip\envskipamount 7143 \fi 7144 \fi 7145}} 7146 7147% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7148% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7149\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7150 7151% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7152% environment contents. 7153\font\circle=lcircle10 7154\newdimen\circthick 7155\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7156\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7157\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7158% 7159\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7160\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7161\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7162\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7163\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7164 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7165 \hskip\rskip}} 7166\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7167 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7168 \hskip\rskip}} 7169% 7170\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7171 7172\envdef\cartouche{% 7173 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7174 \startsavinginserts 7175 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7176 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7177 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7178 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7179 \cartouter=\hsize 7180 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7181 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7182 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7183 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7184 % 7185 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7186 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7187 % collide with the section heading. 7188 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7189 % 7190 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7191 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7192 \carttop 7193 \hbox\bgroup 7194 \hskip\lskip 7195 \vrule\kern3pt 7196 \vbox\bgroup 7197 \kern3pt 7198 \hsize=\cartinner 7199 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7200 \lineskip=\normlskip 7201 \parskip=\normpskip 7202 \vskip -\parskip 7203 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7204} 7205\def\Ecartouche{% 7206 \ifhmode\par\fi 7207 \kern3pt 7208 \egroup 7209 \kern3pt\vrule 7210 \hskip\rskip 7211 \egroup 7212 \cartbot 7213 \egroup 7214 \addgroupbox 7215 \checkinserts 7216} 7217 7218 7219% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7220% inside a group. 7221\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7222\def\nonfillstart{% 7223 \aboveenvbreak 7224 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7225 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7226 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7227 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7228 \parskip = 0pt 7229 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7230 % the normal \indent. 7231 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7232 \parindent = 0pt 7233 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7234 % 7235 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7236 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7237 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7238 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7239 \else 7240 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7241 \fi 7242 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7243} 7244 7245\begingroup 7246\obeyspaces 7247% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7248% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7249% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7250% @indent. 7251\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7252\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7253\ifx\temp % 7254\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7255\else% 7256\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7257\fi% 7258}% 7259\endgroup 7260\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7261\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7262 7263% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7264% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7265% This affects the following displayed environments: 7266% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7267% 7268\def\smallword{small} 7269\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7270\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7271\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7272 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7273 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7274 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7275 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7276 % to change the fonts afterward. 7277 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7278 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7279 \fi 7280} 7281\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7282 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7283 \else 7284 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7285 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7286 \fi 7287} 7288 7289% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7290% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7291\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7292 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7293 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7294 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7295 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7296} 7297 7298% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7299\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7300 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7301 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7302} 7303% 7304% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7305% @example: same as @lisp. 7306% 7307% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7308% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7309% 7310\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7311 \nonfillstart 7312 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7313 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7314 \gobble % eat return 7315} 7316% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7317% 7318\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7319 \nonfillstart 7320 \gobble 7321} 7322 7323% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7324% 7325\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7326 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7327 \nonfillstart 7328 \gobble 7329} 7330 7331% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7332\envdef\flushleft{% 7333 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7334 \nonfillstart 7335 \gobble 7336} 7337\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7338 7339% @flushright. 7340% 7341\envdef\flushright{% 7342 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7343 \nonfillstart 7344 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7345 \gobble 7346} 7347\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7348 7349 7350% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7351% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special 7352% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right 7353% should be enough. 7354\envdef\raggedright{% 7355 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7356 \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}% 7357 \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}% 7358} 7359\let\Eraggedright\par 7360 7361\envdef\raggedleft{% 7362 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7363 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7364 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7365 % badness reporting. 7366} 7367\let\Eraggedleft\par 7368 7369\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7370 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7371 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7372 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7373 % badness reporting. 7374} 7375\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7376 7377 7378% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7379% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7380% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7381% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7382% 7383\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7384% 7385\def\quotationstart{% 7386 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7387 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7388 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7389 \fi 7390 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7391} 7392 7393% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7394% doing normal filling. 7395% 7396\def\Equotation{% 7397 \par 7398 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7399 % indent a bit. 7400 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7401 \fi 7402 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7403} 7404\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7405 7406% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7407\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7408 \def\temp{#1}% 7409 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7410 {\bf #1: }% 7411 \fi 7412} 7413 7414% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7415% has no optional argument. 7416% 7417\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7418% 7419\def\indentedblockstart{% 7420 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7421 \parindent=0pt 7422 % 7423 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7424 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7425 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7426 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7427 \else 7428 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7429 \fi 7430} 7431 7432% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7433% 7434\def\Eindentedblock{% 7435 \par 7436 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7437} 7438\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7439 7440 7441% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7442% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7443% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7444% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7445% 7446% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7447% 7448% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7449% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7450% verbatim line. 7451\def\dospecials{% 7452 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7453 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7454 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7455 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7456 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7457 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7458 %\do\`\do\'% 7459} 7460% 7461% [Knuth] p. 380 7462\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7463 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7464% 7465% Setup for the @verb command. 7466% 7467% Eight spaces for a tab 7468\begingroup 7469 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7470 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7471\endgroup 7472% 7473\def\setupverb{% 7474 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7475 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7476 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7477 \tabeightspaces 7478 % Respect line breaks, 7479 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7480 % make each space count 7481 % must do in this order: 7482 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7483} 7484 7485% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7486% 7487% Real tab expansion. 7488\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7489% 7490% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7491% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 7492% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 7493% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 7494% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 7495% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 7496\newbox\verbbox 7497\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7498% 7499\begingroup 7500 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7501 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7502 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7503 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7504 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7505 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7506 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7507 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7508 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 7509 }% 7510 } 7511\endgroup 7512 7513% start the verbatim environment. 7514\def\setupverbatim{% 7515 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7516 \nonfillstart 7517 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7518 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 7519 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 7520 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 7521 \tabexpand 7522 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7523 % Respect line breaks, 7524 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7525 % make each space count. 7526 % Must do in this order: 7527 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7528 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 7529} 7530 7531% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7532% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7533% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7534% 7535% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7536% 7537% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7538\begingroup 7539 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7540 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7541\endgroup 7542% 7543\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7544% 7545% 7546% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7547% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7548% 7549% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7550% 7551% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7552% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7553% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7554% 7555% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7556% 7557\begingroup 7558 \catcode`\ =\active 7559 \obeylines % 7560 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7561 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7562 % line in the output. 7563 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7564 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7565 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7566\endgroup 7567% 7568\envdef\verbatim{% 7569 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7570} 7571\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7572 7573 7574% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7575% 7576\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7577% 7578\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7579 {% 7580 \makevalueexpandable 7581 \setupverbatim 7582 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7583 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7584 \input #1 7585 \afterenvbreak 7586 }% 7587} 7588 7589% @copying ... @end copying. 7590% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7591% 7592% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7593% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7594% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7595% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7596% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7597% possible is desirable. 7598% 7599\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7600\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7601% 7602\def\insertcopying{% 7603 \begingroup 7604 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7605 \scanexp\copyingtext 7606 \endgroup 7607} 7608 7609 7610\message{defuns,} 7611% @defun etc. 7612 7613\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7614\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7615\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7616\newcount\defunpenalty 7617 7618% Start the processing of @deffn: 7619\def\startdefun{% 7620 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7621 \medbreak 7622 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7623 % following @def command, see below. 7624 \else 7625 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7626 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7627 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7628 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7629 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7630 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7631 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7632 % 7633 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7634 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7635 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7636 % @def command. 7637 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7638 % 7639 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7640 % But do insert the glue. 7641 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7642 \fi 7643 % 7644 \parindent=0in 7645 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7646 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7647} 7648 7649\def\dodefunx#1{% 7650 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7651 \checkenv#1% 7652 % 7653 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7654 % It's not a great place, though. 7655 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7656 % 7657 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7658 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7659} 7660\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7661 7662% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7663% 7664\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7665 \begingroup 7666 % call \deffnheader: 7667 #1#2 \endheader 7668 % common ending: 7669 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7670 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7671 \endgraf 7672 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7673 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7674 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7675 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7676 \checkparencounts 7677 \endgroup 7678} 7679 7680\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7681 7682% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7683% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7684% 7685\def\makedefun#1{% 7686 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7687 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7688 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7689 \temp 7690} 7691 7692% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7693% 7694% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7695% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7696% 7697\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7698 \envdef#1{% 7699 \startdefun 7700 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7701 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7702 }% 7703 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7704 \def#3% 7705} 7706 7707\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7708\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7709 7710% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7711% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7712% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7713% 7714\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7715 \def\temp{#1}% 7716 \ifx\temp\onword 7717 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7718 = \empty 7719 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7720 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7721 = \relax 7722 \else 7723 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7724 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7725 must be on|off}% 7726 \fi\fi 7727} 7728 7729% Untyped functions: 7730 7731% @deffn category name args 7732\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7733 7734% @deffn category class name args 7735\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7736 7737% \defopon {category on}class name args 7738\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7739 7740% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7741% 7742\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7743 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 7744 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7745 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7746} 7747 7748% Typed functions: 7749 7750% @deftypefn category type name args 7751\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7752 7753% @deftypeop category class type name args 7754\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7755 7756% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7757\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7758 7759% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7760% 7761\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7762 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7763 \doingtypefntrue 7764 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7765} 7766 7767% Typed variables: 7768 7769% @deftypevr category type var args 7770\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7771 7772% @deftypecv category class type var args 7773\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7774 7775% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7776\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7777 7778% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7779% 7780\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7781 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7782 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7783} 7784 7785% Untyped variables: 7786 7787% @defvr category var args 7788\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7789 7790% @defcv category class var args 7791\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7792 7793% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7794\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7795 7796% Types: 7797 7798% @deftp category name args 7799\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7800 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7801 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7802} 7803 7804% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7805\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7806\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7807\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7808\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7809\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7810\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7811\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7812\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7813\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7814\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7815\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7816 7817% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7818% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7819% #2 is the return type, if any. 7820% #3 is the function name. 7821% 7822% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7823% 7824\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7825 \par 7826 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7827 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7828 % 7829 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7830 % on a line by itself. 7831 \rettypeownlinefalse 7832 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7833 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7834 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7835 \rettypeownlinetrue 7836 \fi 7837 \fi 7838 % 7839 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7840 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7841 % just below it. 7842 \def\temp{#1}% 7843 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7844 % 7845 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7846 % least two. 7847 \tempnum = 2 7848 % 7849 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7850 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7851 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7852 % 7853 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7854 \ifrettypeownline 7855 \advance\tempnum by 1 7856 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7857 \else 7858 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7859 \fi 7860 % 7861 % The continuations: 7862 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7863 % 7864 % The final paragraph shape: 7865 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7866 % 7867 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7868 \noindent 7869 \hbox to 0pt{% 7870 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7871 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7872 \kern\leftskip 7873 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7874 }% 7875 % 7876 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7877 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7878 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7879 {% 7880 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7881 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7882 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7883 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7884 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7885 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7886 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7887 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7888 \df \tt 7889 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7890 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7891 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7892 \ifrettypeownline 7893 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7894 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7895 \else 7896 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7897 \fi 7898 \fi % no return type 7899 #3% output function name 7900 }% 7901 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7902 % 7903 \boldbrax 7904 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7905} 7906 7907% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7908% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7909% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7910% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7911% 7912\def\defunargs#1{% 7913 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7914 % tt for the names. 7915 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7916 % 7917 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7918 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7919 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7920 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7921 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7922 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7923 #1% 7924 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7925} 7926 7927% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7928% 7929\def\activeparens{% 7930 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7931 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7932 \catcode`\&=\active 7933} 7934 7935% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7936\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7937 7938% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7939% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7940% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7941{ 7942 \activeparens 7943 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7944 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7945 \global\let& = \& 7946 7947 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7948 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7949} 7950 7951\newcount\parencount 7952 7953% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7954\newif\ifampseen 7955\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7956 7957\def\parenfont{% 7958 \ifampseen 7959 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7960 % otherwise use the default font. 7961 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7962 \else 7963 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7964 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7965 \sf 7966 \fi 7967} 7968\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7969 \ifampseen 7970 \ifnum\parencount=1 7971 #1% 7972 \fi 7973 \fi 7974} 7975\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7976 7977\def\opnr{% 7978 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7979 {\parenfont(}% 7980 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7981} 7982\def\clnr{% 7983 {\parenfont)}% 7984 \infirstlevel \sl 7985 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7986} 7987 7988\newcount\brackcount 7989\def\lbrb{% 7990 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7991 {\bf[}% 7992} 7993\def\rbrb{% 7994 {\bf]}% 7995 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7996} 7997 7998\def\checkparencounts{% 7999 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 8000 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 8001} 8002% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 8003% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 8004\def\badparencount{% 8005 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 8006 \global\parencount=0 8007} 8008\def\badbrackcount{% 8009 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 8010 \global\brackcount=0 8011} 8012 8013 8014\message{macros,} 8015% @macro. 8016 8017% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 8018% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 8019\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8020 \newwrite\macscribble 8021 \def\scantokens#1{% 8022 \toks0={#1}% 8023 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 8024 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 8025 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 8026 \input \jobname.tmp 8027 } 8028\fi 8029 8030% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math 8031\let\texinfoc=\c 8032 8033\newcount\savedcatcodeone 8034\newcount\savedcatcodetwo 8035 8036% Used at the time of macro expansion. 8037% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 8038\def\scanmacro#1{% 8039 \newlinechar`\^^M 8040 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 8041 % 8042 % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex. Set catcode of @ to 8043 % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when 8044 % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character. 8045 \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@ 8046 \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\ 8047 \catcode`\@=0 8048 \catcode`\\=\active 8049 % 8050 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8051 \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}% 8052 % 8053 \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone 8054 \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo 8055 % 8056 % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8057 % can be noticed by \parsearg. 8058 % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup 8059 % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves. 8060} 8061 8062% Used for copying and captions 8063\def\scanexp#1{% 8064 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8065} 8066 8067\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8068\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8069\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8070 8071% List of all defined macros in the form 8072% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8073% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8074% if there is a need. 8075\def\macrolist{} 8076 8077% Add the macro to \macrolist 8078\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8079\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8080 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8081 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8082} 8083 8084% Utility routines. 8085% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8086% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8087% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8088% 8089\def\cslet#1#2{% 8090 \expandafter\let 8091 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8092 \csname#2\endcsname 8093} 8094 8095% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8096% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8097{\catcode`\@=11 8098\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8099\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8100\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8101\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8102\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8103} 8104 8105% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8106{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8107\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8108\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8109\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8110} 8111 8112% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8113% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8114% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8115% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8116% 8117% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8118% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8119% confine the change to the current group. 8120% 8121% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8122% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8123% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8124% 8125\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8126 \catcode`\"=\other 8127 \catcode`\+=\other 8128 \catcode`\<=\other 8129 \catcode`\>=\other 8130 \catcode`\^=\other 8131 \catcode`\_=\other 8132 \catcode`\|=\other 8133 \catcode`\~=\other 8134 \passthroughcharstrue 8135} 8136 8137\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8138 \scanctxt 8139 \catcode`\@=\other 8140 \catcode`\\=\other 8141 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8142} 8143 8144\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8145 \scanctxt 8146 \catcode`\ =\other 8147 \catcode`\@=\other 8148 \catcode`\{=\other 8149 \catcode`\}=\other 8150 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8151 \usembodybackslash 8152} 8153 8154% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8155% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8156% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8157\def\macroargctxt{% 8158 \scanctxt 8159 \catcode`\ =\active 8160 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8161 \catcode`\\=\active 8162} 8163 8164\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8165 \scanctxt 8166 \catcode`\{=\other 8167 \catcode`\}=\other 8168} 8169 8170% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8171% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8172% where N is the macro parameter number. 8173% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8174% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8175% 8176{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8177 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8178 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8179} 8180\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8181 8182\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8183 8184\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8185\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8186 8187\def\macroxxx#1{% 8188 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8189 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8190 \paramno=0\relax 8191 \else 8192 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8193 \if\paramno>256\relax 8194 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8195 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8196 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8197 \fi 8198 \fi 8199 \fi 8200 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8201 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8202 \else 8203 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8204 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8205 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8206 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8207 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8208 \fi 8209 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8210 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8211 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8212 \fi} 8213 8214\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8215 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8216 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8217 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8218 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8219 \begingroup 8220 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8221 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8222 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8223 \endgroup 8224 \else 8225 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8226 \fi 8227} 8228 8229% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8230% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8231% 8232\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8233 \ifx #1\relax 8234 % remove this 8235 \else 8236 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8237 \fi 8238} 8239 8240% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8241% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8242\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8243\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8244\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8245\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8246% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8247% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8248% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8249 8250% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8251% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8252% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8253% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8254% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8255% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8256% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8257% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8258% 8259% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8260% 8261% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8262% \parsemmanyargdef. 8263% 8264\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8265 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8266 \let\hash\relax 8267 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8268 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8269 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8270 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8271 \paramno0\relax 8272 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8273 \fi 8274} 8275\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8276 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8277 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8278 \advance\paramno by 1 8279 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8280 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8281 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8282 \fi\next} 8283 8284% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8285% 8286% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8287% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8288% 8289% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8290% body to be transformed. 8291% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8292% 8293{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8294\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8295{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8296\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8297 8298% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8299\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8300\catcode `@=11\relax 8301 8302%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8303 8304% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8305% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8306% processed again to replace the arguments. 8307% 8308% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8309% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8310% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8311% 8312% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8313% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8314% 8315% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8316% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8317% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8318% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8319% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8320% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8321\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8322 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8323 \else 8324 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8325 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8326 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8327 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8328 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8329 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8330 % \xdef . 8331 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8332 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8333 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8334 \fi\next} 8335 8336 8337\let\endargs@\relax 8338\let\nil@\relax 8339\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8340\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8341 8342% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8343% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8344% macarg.ARGNAME 8345% 8346% #1 is the macro name 8347% #2 is the list of argument names 8348% #3 is the list of argument values 8349\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8350 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8351 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8352 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8353 \def\macroname{#1}% 8354 \begingroup 8355 \macroargctxt 8356 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8357 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8358 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8359 \setemptyargvalues@ 8360 \else 8361 \getargvals@@ 8362 \fi 8363} 8364\def\getargvals@@{% 8365 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8366 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8367 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8368 \else 8369 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8370 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8371 \fi 8372 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8373 \else 8374 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8375 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8376 % macros to empty. 8377 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8378 \else 8379 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8380 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8381 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8382 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8383 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8384 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8385 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8386 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8387 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8388 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8389 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8390 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8391 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8392 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8393 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8394 \fi 8395 \fi 8396 \next 8397} 8398 8399\def\push@#1#2{% 8400 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8401 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8402 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8403 \expandafter#1#2}% 8404} 8405 8406% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8407% in macro \@tempa. 8408% 8409\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8410 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8411 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8412 % values into respective token registers. 8413 % 8414 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8415 \begingroup 8416 \paramno0\relax 8417 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8418 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8419 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8420 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8421 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8422 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8423 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8424 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8425 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8426 % group. 8427 \expandafter 8428 \endgroup 8429 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8430 } 8431 8432% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8433% 8434\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8435 \expandafter 8436 \endgroup 8437 \macargdeflist@ 8438 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8439 % is in \@tempa . 8440 \macvalstoargs@ 8441 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8442 % with \@tempb . 8443 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8444 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8445 % \egroup . 8446 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8447 \let\@tempc\relax 8448 \else 8449 \let\@tempc\egroup 8450 \fi 8451 % And now we do the real job: 8452 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8453 \@tempd 8454} 8455 8456\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8457 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8458 \else 8459 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8460 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8461 % alias \@tempb . 8462 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8463 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8464 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8465 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8466 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8467 \fi 8468 \next 8469} 8470 8471% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8472% 8473\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8474 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8475 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8476 \else 8477 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8478 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8479 \fi 8480 \next 8481} 8482 8483\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8484 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8485 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8486 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8487 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8488} 8489 8490% #1 is the element target macro 8491% #2 is the list macro 8492% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8493\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8494 \def#1{#3}% 8495 \def#2{#4}% 8496} 8497\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8498 \long\def#1{#3}% 8499 \long\def#2{#4}% 8500} 8501 8502 8503%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8504 8505 8506% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8507% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8508% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8509% \paramno is the number of parameters 8510% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8511% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8512% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8513% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8514% 8515\def\defmacro{% 8516 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8517 \ifnum\paramno=1 8518 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8519 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8520 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8521 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8522 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8523 \else 8524 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8525 \fi 8526 \ifcase\paramno 8527 % 0 8528 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8529 \bgroup 8530 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8531 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8532 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8533 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8534 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8535 \egroup 8536 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8537 \or % 1 8538 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8539 \bgroup 8540 \noexpand\braceorline 8541 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8542 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8543 \egroup 8544 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8545 }% 8546 \else % at most 9 8547 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8548 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8549 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8550 % comma. 8551 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8552 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8553 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8554 \bgroup 8555 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8556 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8557 \noexpand\expandafter 8558 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8559 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8560 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8561 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8562 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8563 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8564 \expandafter\expandafter 8565 \expandafter\xdef 8566 \expandafter\expandafter 8567 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8568 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8569 \else % 10 or more: 8570 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8571 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8572 }% 8573 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8574 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8575 \fi 8576 \fi} 8577 8578\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8579 8580\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8581 8582 8583%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8584% 8585{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8586@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8587@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8588 8589% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8590% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8591% compressed to one. 8592% 8593% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8594% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8595% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8596% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8597% 8598% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8599% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8600% 8601% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8602% 8603% where: 8604% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8605% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8606% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8607% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8608 8609@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8610 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8611} 8612@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8613 8614% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8615% #2 - PENDING_BS 8616% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8617% #4 used to look ahead 8618% 8619% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8620% otherwise, remove the next token. 8621@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8622 @ifx#4\% 8623 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8624 @else 8625 @expandafter@add_segment 8626 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8627} 8628 8629% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8630% #2 - PENDING_BS 8631% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8632% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8633% #5 looks ahead 8634% 8635% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8636@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8637 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8638} 8639 8640@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8641 8642% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8643% #2 - PENDING_BS 8644% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8645% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8646% 8647% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8648% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8649% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8650% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8651% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8652% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8653% added to ARG_RESULT. 8654@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8655@ifx#3@_finish 8656 @call_the_macro#1!% 8657@else 8658 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8659 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8660 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8661 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8662 % long #4 is. 8663} 8664 8665% #1 - THE_MACRO 8666% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8667% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8668% conditional. 8669@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8670 8671} 8672%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8673 8674% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8675% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8676% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8677% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8678% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8679% 8680\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8681\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8682 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8683 \macroargctxt 8684 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8685 \else 8686 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8687 \fi \macnamexxx} 8688 8689 8690% @alias. 8691% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8692% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8693% 8694\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8695\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8696\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8697 {% 8698 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8699 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8700 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8701 }% 8702 \next 8703} 8704 8705 8706\message{cross references,} 8707 8708\newwrite\auxfile 8709\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8710\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8711 8712% @inforef is relatively simple. 8713\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8714\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8715 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8716 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8717 8718% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8719% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8720% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8721% @node foo , bar , ... 8722% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8723% 8724\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8725% 8726% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8727% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8728\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8729\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 8730 8731\let\nwnode=\node 8732\let\lastnode=\empty 8733 8734% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8735% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8736% 8737\def\donoderef#1{% 8738 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8739 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8740 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8741 \fi 8742} 8743 8744% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8745% 8746\newcount\savesfregister 8747% 8748\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8749\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8750\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8751 8752% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8753% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8754% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 8755% or the anchor name. 8756% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8757% empty for anchors. 8758% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8759% 8760% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8761% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8762% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8763% 8764\def\setref#1#2{% 8765 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8766 \iflinks 8767 {% 8768 \requireauxfile 8769 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8770 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8771 \def\value##1{##1}% 8772 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8773 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8774 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8775 }% 8776 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 8777 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8778 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8779 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8780 }% 8781 \fi 8782} 8783 8784% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8785% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8786% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8787% variable, now it's official. 8788% 8789\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8790 \def\temp{#1}% 8791 \ifx\temp\onword 8792 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8793 = \empty 8794 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8795 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8796 = \relax 8797 \else 8798 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8799 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8800 must be on|off}% 8801 \fi\fi 8802} 8803 8804% 8805% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8806% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8807% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8808% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8809% 8810\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8811\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8812\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8813 8814\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8815\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8816% 8817\newbox\toprefbox 8818\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8819\newbox\infofilenamebox 8820\newbox\printedmanualbox 8821% 8822\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8823 \unsepspaces 8824 % 8825 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8826 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8827 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8828 % 8829 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8830 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8831 % 8832 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8833 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8834 % 8835 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8836 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8837 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8838 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8839 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8840 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8841 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8842 \else 8843 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8844 % the square brackets if we have it. 8845 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8846 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8847 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8848 \else 8849 \ifhavexrefs 8850 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8851 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8852 \else 8853 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8854 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8855 \fi% 8856 \fi 8857 \fi 8858 \fi 8859 % 8860 % Make link in pdf output. 8861 \ifpdf 8862 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8863 {\indexnofonts 8864 \makevalueexpandable 8865 \turnoffactive 8866 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8867 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8868 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8869 \getfilename{#4}% 8870 % 8871 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8872 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8873 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8874 % 8875 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8876 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8877 \fi 8878 % 8879 \leavevmode 8880 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8881 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8882 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8883 \else 8884 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8885 \fi 8886 }% 8887 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8888 \else 8889 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8890 \else 8891 % For XeTeX 8892 {\indexnofonts 8893 \makevalueexpandable 8894 \turnoffactive 8895 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8896 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8897 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8898 \getfilename{#4}% 8899 % 8900 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8901 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8902 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8903 % 8904 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8905 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8906 \fi 8907 % 8908 \leavevmode 8909 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8910 % With default settings, 8911 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8912 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8913 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8914 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8915 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8916 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8917 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8918 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8919 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8920 \else 8921 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8922 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8923 \fi 8924 }% 8925 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8926 \fi 8927 \fi 8928 {% 8929 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8930 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8931 \indexnofonts 8932 \turnoffactive 8933 \def\value##1{##1}% 8934 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8935 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8936 }% 8937 % 8938 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8939 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8940 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8941 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8942 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8943 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8944 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8945 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 8946 \else 8947 \printedrefname 8948 \fi 8949 % 8950 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8951 % "in MANUALNAME". 8952 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8953 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8954 \fi 8955 \else 8956 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8957 % 8958 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8959 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8960 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8961 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8962 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8963 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8964 % 8965 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8966 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8967 % 8968 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8969 % 8970 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8971 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8972 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8973 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8974 % 8975 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8976 % 8977 \else 8978 % Reference within this manual. 8979 % 8980 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8981 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8982 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8983 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8984 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8985 {\turnoffactive 8986 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8987 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8988 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8989 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8990 }% 8991 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8992 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8993 % 8994 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8995 ,\space 8996 % 8997 % output the `page 3'. 8998 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 8999 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 9000 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 9001 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 9002 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 9003 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 9004 \else\ifx\ 9005 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 9006 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 9007 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 9008 \fi\fi 9009 \fi 9010 \endlink 9011\endgroup} 9012 9013% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 9014% 9015% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 9016% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 9017% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 9018% 9019% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 9020% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 9021% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 9022% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 9023% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 9024% 9025% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 9026% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 9027% 9028\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 9029 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 9030 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 9031 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 9032 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9033 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9034 \fi 9035 \fi 9036 #1% 9037} 9038 9039% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9040% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9041% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9042% one that Bob is working on :). 9043% 9044\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9045 9046% Things referred to by \setref. 9047% 9048\def\Ynothing{} 9049\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9050\def\Ynumbered{% 9051 \ifnum\secno=0 9052 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9053 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9054 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9055 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9056 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9057 \else 9058 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9059 \fi\fi\fi 9060} 9061\def\Yappendix{% 9062 \ifnum\secno=0 9063 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9064 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9065 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9066 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9067 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9068 \else 9069 \putwordSection@tie 9070 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9071 \fi\fi\fi 9072} 9073 9074% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9075% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9076\def\refx#1#2{% 9077 \requireauxfile 9078 {% 9079 \indexnofonts 9080 \otherbackslash 9081 \def\value##1{##1}% 9082 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9083 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9084 }% 9085 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9086 % If not defined, say something at least. 9087 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9088 \iflinks 9089 \ifhavexrefs 9090 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9091 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9092 \else 9093 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9094 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9095 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9096 \fi 9097 \fi 9098 \fi 9099 \else 9100 % It's defined, so just use it. 9101 \thisrefX 9102 \fi 9103 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9104} 9105 9106% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9107% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9108% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9109% type, we have more work to do. 9110% 9111\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9112 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9113 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9114 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9115 \indexnofonts 9116 \turnoffactive 9117 \def\value##1{##1}% 9118 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9119 }% 9120 % 9121 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 9122 % 9123 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9124 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9125 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9126 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9127 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9128 % 9129 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9130 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9131 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9132 \else 9133 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9134 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9135 \fi 9136 % 9137 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9138 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9139 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9140 {\safexrefname}}% 9141 \fi 9142} 9143 9144% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9145% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9146% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9147% 9148\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9149\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9150 9151% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9152\def\requireauxfile{% 9153 \iflinks 9154 \tryauxfile 9155 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9156 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9157 \fi 9158 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9159} 9160 9161% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9162% 9163\def\tryauxfile{% 9164 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9165 \ifeof 1 \else 9166 \readdatafile{aux}% 9167 \global\havexrefstrue 9168 \fi 9169 \closein 1 9170} 9171 9172\def\setupdatafile{% 9173 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9174 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9175 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9176 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9177 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9178 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9179 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9180 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9181 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9182 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9183 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9184 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9185 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9186 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9187 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9188 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9189 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9190 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9191 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9192 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9193 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9194 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9195 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9196 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9197 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9198 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9199 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9200 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 9201 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 9202 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 9203 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 9204 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 9205 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 9206 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 9207 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 9208 % 9209 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 9210 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 9211 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 9212 % 9213 \catcode`\^=\other 9214 % 9215 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9216 \catcode`\~=\other 9217 \catcode`\[=\other 9218 \catcode`\]=\other 9219 \catcode`\"=\other 9220 \catcode`\_=\other 9221 \catcode`\|=\other 9222 \catcode`\<=\other 9223 \catcode`\>=\other 9224 \catcode`\$=\other 9225 \catcode`\#=\other 9226 \catcode`\&=\other 9227 \catcode`\%=\other 9228 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9229 % 9230 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 9231 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 9232 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 9233 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 9234 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 9235 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 9236 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 9237 \catcode`\\=\other 9238 % 9239 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9240 \catcode`\{=1 9241 \catcode`\}=2 9242 \catcode`\@=0 9243} 9244 9245\def\readdatafile#1{% 9246\begingroup 9247 \setupdatafile 9248 \input\jobname.#1 9249\endgroup} 9250 9251 9252\message{insertions,} 9253% including footnotes. 9254 9255\newcount \footnoteno 9256 9257% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9258% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9259% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9260% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9261% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9262\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9263 9264% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9265\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9266 9267{\catcode `\@=11 9268% 9269% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9270\gdef\footnote{% 9271 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9272 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9273 % 9274 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9275 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9276 \let\@sf\empty 9277 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9278 % 9279 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9280 \unskip 9281 \thisfootno\@sf 9282 \dofootnote 9283}% 9284 9285% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9286% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9287% 9288% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9289% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9290% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9291% 9292\gdef\dofootnote{% 9293 \insert\footins\bgroup 9294 % 9295 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9296 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9297 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9298 % 9299 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9300 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9301 % So reset some parameters. 9302 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9303 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9304 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9305 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9306 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9307 \leftskip\z@skip 9308 \rightskip\z@skip 9309 \spaceskip\z@skip 9310 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9311 \parindent\defaultparindent 9312 % 9313 \smallfonts \rm 9314 % 9315 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9316 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9317 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9318 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9319 \let\noindent = \relax 9320 % 9321 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9322 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9323 \everypar = {\hang}% 9324 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9325 % 9326 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9327 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9328 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9329 \footstrut 9330 % 9331 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9332 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9333} 9334}%end \catcode `\@=11 9335 9336\def\errfootnotenest{% 9337 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9338 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9339 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9340} 9341 9342\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9343 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9344 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9345} 9346 9347% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9348% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9349% would be lost. 9350% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9351% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9352% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9353% 9354% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9355% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9356% out prematurely. 9357% 9358\def\startsavinginserts{% 9359 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9360 \let\insert\saveinsert 9361 \else 9362 \let\checkinserts\relax 9363 \fi 9364} 9365 9366% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9367% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9368% 9369\def\saveinsert#1{% 9370 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9371 \afterassignment\next 9372 % swallow the left brace 9373 \let\temp = 9374} 9375\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9376\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9377 9378\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9379 9380\def\placesaveins#1{% 9381 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9382 {\box#1}% 9383} 9384 9385% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9386{ 9387 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9388 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9389} 9390 9391% initialization: 9392\def\newsaveins #1{% 9393 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9394 \next 9395} 9396\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9397 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9398 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9399 \checksaveins #1}% 9400} 9401 9402% initialize: 9403\let\checkinserts\empty 9404\newsaveins\footins 9405\newsaveins\margin 9406 9407 9408% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9409% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9410% 9411% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9412% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9413% undone and the next image would fail. 9414\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9415\ifeof 1 \else 9416 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9417 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9418 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9419 \input epsf.tex 9420\fi 9421\closein 1 9422% 9423% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9424\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9425\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9426 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9427 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 9428% 9429\def\image#1{% 9430 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9431 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9432 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9433 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9434 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9435 \fi 9436 \else 9437 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9438 \fi 9439} 9440% 9441% Arguments to @image: 9442% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9443% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9444% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9445% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9446% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9447\newif\ifimagevmode 9448\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9449 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9450 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9451 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9452 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9453 \ifvmode 9454 \imagevmodetrue 9455 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9456 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9457 \imagevmodetrue 9458 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9459 \fi\fi 9460 % 9461 \ifimagevmode 9462 \nobreak\medskip 9463 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9464 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9465 % above and below. 9466 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9467 \nobreak 9468 \fi 9469 % 9470 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9471 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9472 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9473 % normal paragraph indentation. 9474 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9475 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9476 % eradicate the centering. 9477 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9478 % 9479 % Output the image. 9480 \ifpdf 9481 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9482 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9483 \else 9484 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9485 % For epsf.tex 9486 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9487 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9488 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9489 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9490 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9491 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9492 \else 9493 % For XeTeX 9494 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9495 \fi 9496 \fi 9497 % 9498 \ifimagevmode 9499 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9500 \fi 9501 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9502\endgroup} 9503 9504 9505% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9506% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9507% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9508% 9509\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9510 9511% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9512\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9513 9514% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9515% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9516% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9517% 9518% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9519% be referable. 9520% 9521% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9522% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9523% 9524% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9525% chapter-level command. 9526\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9527% 9528\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9529 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9530 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9531 % 9532 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9533 % 9534 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9535 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9536 % 9537 \startsavinginserts 9538 % 9539 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9540 \par 9541 % 9542 \vtop\bgroup 9543 \def\floattype{#1}% 9544 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9545 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9546 % 9547 \ifx\floattype\empty 9548 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9549 \else 9550 {% 9551 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9552 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9553 \indexnofonts 9554 \turnoffactive 9555 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9556 }% 9557 \fi 9558 % 9559 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9560 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9561 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9562 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9563 % 9564 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9565 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9566 % 9567 {% 9568 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 9569 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9570 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9571 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9572 % lists of floats. 9573 % 9574 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9575 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9576 }% 9577 \fi 9578 % 9579 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9580 \vskip\parskip 9581 % 9582 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9583 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9584} 9585 9586% we have these possibilities: 9587% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9588% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9589% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9590% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9591% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9592% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9593% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9594% @float & no caption: 9595% 9596\def\Efloat{% 9597 \let\floatident = \empty 9598 % 9599 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9600 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9601 % 9602 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9603 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9604 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9605 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9606 \fi 9607 % the number. 9608 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9609 \fi 9610 % 9611 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9612 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9613 \let\captionline = \floatident 9614 % 9615 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9616 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9617 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9618 \fi 9619 % 9620 % caption text. 9621 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9622 \fi 9623 % 9624 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9625 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9626 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9627 \vskip.5\parskip 9628 \captionline 9629 % 9630 % Space below caption. 9631 \vskip\parskip 9632 \fi 9633 % 9634 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9635 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9636 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9637 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9638 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9639 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9640 {% 9641 \requireauxfile 9642 \atdummies 9643 % 9644 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9645 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9646 \else 9647 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9648 \fi 9649 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9650 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9651 }% 9652 \fi 9653 \egroup % end of \vtop 9654 % 9655 \checkinserts 9656} 9657 9658% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9659% 9660\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9661 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9662} 9663 9664% @caption, @shortcaption 9665% 9666\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9667\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9668\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9669\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9670 9671% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9672% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9673\def\getfloatno#1{% 9674 \ifx#1\relax 9675 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9676 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9677 % 9678 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9679 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9680 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9681 \fi 9682 \let\floatno#1% 9683} 9684 9685% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9686% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9687% first read the @float command. 9688% 9689\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9690 9691% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9692% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9693\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9694 9695% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9696% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9697% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 9698% 9699\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9700% 9701% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9702% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9703% 9704\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9705 \def\temp{#1}% 9706 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9707 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9708} 9709 9710% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9711% 9712\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9713 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9714 {% 9715 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9716 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9717 \indexnofonts 9718 \turnoffactive 9719 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9720 }% 9721 % 9722 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9723 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9724 \ifhavexrefs 9725 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9726 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9727 \fi 9728 \else 9729 \begingroup 9730 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9731 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9732 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9733 \endgroup 9734 \fi 9735} 9736 9737% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9738% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9739% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9740% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9741% 9742% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9743% they won't appear in the aux file). 9744% 9745\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9746\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9747 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9748 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9749 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9750 % in pdf output. 9751 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9752 % 9753 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9754 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9755 \writeentry 9756}} 9757 9758 9759\message{localization,} 9760 9761% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9762% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9763% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9764% 9765{ 9766 \catcode`\_ = \active 9767 \globaldefs=1 9768\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9769 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9770 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9771 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9772 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9773 \ifeof 1 9774 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9775 \else 9776 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9777 \input txi-#1.tex 9778 \fi 9779 \closein 1 9780 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9781} 9782% 9783% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9784% try txi-de.tex. 9785% 9786\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9787 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9788 \ifeof 1 9789 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9790 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9791 \else 9792 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9793 \input txi-#1.tex 9794 \fi 9795 \closein 1 9796} 9797}% end of special _ catcode 9798% 9799\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9800is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9801directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9802 9803% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9804% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9805% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9806% 9807% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9808% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9809% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9810% 9811% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9812% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9813% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9814% accented characters problem.) 9815% 9816\catcode`@=11 9817\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9818 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9819 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9820 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9821 \else 9822 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9823 \fi 9824 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9825 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9826 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9827} 9828 9829% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9830% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9831% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9832% 9833\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9834\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9835 9836\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9837 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9838 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9839 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9840 \else 9841 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9842 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9843 \fi 9844\else 9845 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9846 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9847\fi 9848 9849% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9850% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9851% 9852\def\setbytewiseio{% 9853 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9854 \else 9855 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9856 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9857 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9858 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9859 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9860 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9861 \fi 9862 9863 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9864 \else 9865 \directlua{ 9866 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9867 local function convert_char (char) 9868 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9869 end 9870 9871 local function convert_line (line) 9872 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9873 end 9874 9875 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9876 9877 local function convert_line_out (line) 9878 local line_out = "" 9879 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9880 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9881 end 9882 return line_out 9883 end 9884 9885 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9886 } 9887 \fi 9888 9889 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9890} 9891 9892 9893% Helpers for encodings. 9894% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9895% 9896\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9897 \count255=128 9898 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9899 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9900 \advance\count255 by 1 9901 \repeat 9902} 9903 9904\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9905 \count255=128 9906 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9907 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9908 \advance\count255 by 1 9909 \repeat 9910} 9911 9912% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9913% according to the specified encoding. 9914% 9915\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9916\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9917 % 9918 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9919 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9920 % 9921 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9922 % to compare them with \ifx. 9923 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9924 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9925 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9926 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9927 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9928 % 9929 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9930 \asciichardefs 9931 % 9932 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9933 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9934 \setbytewiseio 9935 \fi 9936 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9937 \lattwochardefs 9938 % 9939 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9940 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9941 \setbytewiseio 9942 \fi 9943 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9944 \latonechardefs 9945 % 9946 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9947 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9948 \setbytewiseio 9949 \fi 9950 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9951 \latninechardefs 9952 % 9953 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9954 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9955 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9956 \nativeunicodechardefs 9957 \else 9958 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9959 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9960 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9961 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9962 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9963 % sufficient. 9964 \fi 9965 % 9966 \else 9967 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9968 % 9969 \fi % utfeight 9970 \fi % latnine 9971 \fi % latone 9972 \fi % lattwo 9973 \fi % ascii 9974 % 9975 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9976 \else 9977 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9978 \else 9979 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9980 \else 9981 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9982 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9983 \fi 9984 \fi 9985 \fi 9986} 9987 9988% emacs-page 9989% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 9990% the default font encoding (OT1). 9991% 9992\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 9993 9994% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 9995\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 9996 9997% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 9998% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 9999% macros containing the character definitions. 10000\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10001% 10002 10003\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 10004\gdef#1{% 10005 \ifpassthroughchars 10006 \string#1% 10007 \else 10008 #2% 10009 \fi 10010}} 10011 10012% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 10013\def\latonechardefs{% 10014 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10015 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 10016 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 10017 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 10018 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 10019 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 10020 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 10021 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10022 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10023 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 10024 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 10025 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 10026 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 10027 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10028 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 10029 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 10030 % 10031 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 10032 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 10033 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 10034 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 10035 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10036 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 10037 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 10038 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 10039 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10040 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 10041 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 10042 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 10043 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 10044 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 10045 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 10046 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10047 % 10048 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10049 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10050 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10051 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10052 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10053 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10054 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10055 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10056 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10057 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10058 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10059 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10060 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10061 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10062 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10063 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10064 % 10065 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10066 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10067 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10068 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10069 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10070 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10071 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10072 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10073 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10074 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10075 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10076 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10077 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10078 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10079 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10080 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10081 % 10082 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10083 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10084 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10085 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10086 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10087 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10088 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10089 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10090 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10091 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10092 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10093 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10094 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10095 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10096 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10097 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10098 % 10099 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10100 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10101 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10102 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10103 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10104 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10105 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10106 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10107 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10108 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10109 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10110 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10111 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10112 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10113 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10114 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10115} 10116 10117% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10118\def\latninechardefs{% 10119 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10120 \latonechardefs 10121 % 10122 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10123 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10124 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10125 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10126 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10127 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10128 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10129 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10130} 10131 10132% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10133\def\lattwochardefs{% 10134 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10135 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10136 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10137 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10138 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10139 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10140 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10141 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10142 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10143 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10144 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10145 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10146 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10147 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10148 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10149 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10150 % 10151 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10152 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10153 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10154 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10155 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10156 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10157 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10158 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10159 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10160 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10161 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10162 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10163 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10164 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10165 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10166 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10167 % 10168 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10169 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10170 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10171 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10172 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10173 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10174 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10175 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10176 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10177 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10178 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10179 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10180 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10181 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10182 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10183 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10184 % 10185 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10186 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10187 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10188 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10189 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10190 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10191 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10192 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10193 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10194 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10195 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10196 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10197 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10198 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10199 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10200 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10201 % 10202 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10203 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10204 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10205 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10206 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10207 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10208 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10209 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10210 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10211 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10212 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10213 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10214 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10215 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10216 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10217 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10218 % 10219 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10220 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10221 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10222 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10223 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10224 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10225 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10226 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10227 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10228 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10229 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10230 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10231 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10232 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10233 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10234 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10235} 10236 10237% UTF-8 character definitions. 10238% 10239% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10240% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10241% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10242% 10243\newcount\countUTFx 10244\newcount\countUTFy 10245\newcount\countUTFz 10246 10247\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10248 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10249% 10250\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10251 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10252% 10253\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10254 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10255 10256\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10257 \ifx #1\relax 10258 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10259 \else 10260 \expandafter #1% 10261 \fi 10262} 10263 10264% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10265\begingroup 10266 \catcode`\~13 10267 \catcode`\$12 10268 \catcode`\"12 10269 10270 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10271 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10272 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10273 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10274 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10275 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10276 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10277 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10278 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10279 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10280 \fi} 10281 10282 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10283 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10284 \countUTFx = "80 10285 \countUTFy = "C2 10286 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10287 \gdef~{% 10288 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10289 \UTFviiiLoop 10290 10291 \countUTFx = "C2 10292 \countUTFy = "E0 10293 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10294 \gdef~{% 10295 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10296 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10297 \UTFviiiLoop 10298 10299 \countUTFx = "E0 10300 \countUTFy = "F0 10301 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10302 \gdef~{% 10303 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10304 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10305 \UTFviiiLoop 10306 10307 \countUTFx = "F0 10308 \countUTFy = "F4 10309 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10310 \gdef~{% 10311 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10312 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10313 }}% 10314 \UTFviiiLoop 10315\endgroup 10316 10317\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10318 10319% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10320\def\U#1{% 10321 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10322 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10323 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10324 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10325 % letters are missing. 10326 \begingroup 10327 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10328 \uppercase{.} 10329 \endgroup 10330 \else 10331 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10332 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10333 \fi 10334 \else 10335 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10336 \fi 10337} 10338 10339% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10340% sequence to be defined. 10341\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10342 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10343\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10344 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10345\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10346 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10347 10348% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10349% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10350% this gets used by the @U command 10351% 10352\begingroup 10353 \catcode`\"=12 10354 \catcode`\<=12 10355 \catcode`\.=12 10356 \catcode`\,=12 10357 \catcode`\;=12 10358 \catcode`\!=12 10359 \catcode`\~=13 10360 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10361 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10362 \begingroup 10363 \parseXMLCharref 10364 10365 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10366 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10367 % 10368 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10369 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10370 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10371 % 10372 \expandafter\expandafter 10373 \expandafter\expandafter 10374 \expandafter\expandafter 10375 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10376 % 10377 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10378 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10379 \fi 10380 % 10381 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10382 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10383 \endgroup} 10384 % 10385 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10386 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10387 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10388 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10389 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10390 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10391 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10392 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10393 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10394 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10395 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10396 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10397 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10398 \else 10399 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10400 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10401 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10402 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10403 \fi\fi\fi 10404 } 10405 10406 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10407 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10408 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10409 % of the bytes. 10410 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10411 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10412 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10413 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10414 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10415 10416 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10417 % in order to get the last five bits. 10418 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10419 10420 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10421 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10422 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10423 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10424 10425 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10426 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10427 % sequence. 10428 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10429 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10430 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10431 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10432 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10433 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10434 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10435 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10436\endgroup 10437 10438% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10439% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10440% 10441\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10442 \catcode"#1=\other 10443} 10444 10445% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10446% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10447% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10448% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10449% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10450% 10451% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10452% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10453% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10454% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10455% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10456% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10457% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10458% 10459\def\unicodechardefs{% 10460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10476 % 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10493 % 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10510 % 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10527 % 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10544 % 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10561 % 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10578 % 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10595 % 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10612 % 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10629 % 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10646 % 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10663 % 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10680 % 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10697 % 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10710 % 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10716 % 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10723 % 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10736 % 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10739 % 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10746 % 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10750 % 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10752 % 10753 % Greek letters upper case 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10771 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10779 % 10780 % Vowels with accents 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10787 % 10788 % Standalone accent 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10790 % 10791 % Greek letters lower case 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10817 % 10818 % More Greek vowels with accents 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10824 % 10825 % Variant Greek letters 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10829 % 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10842 % 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10845 % 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10854 % 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10867 % 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10878 % 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10889 % 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10900 % 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10905 % 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10922 % 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10933 % 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10936 % 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10941 % 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10946 % 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10949 % 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10953 % 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10956 % 10957 % Punctuation 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10973 % 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10975 % 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10978 % 10979 % Mathematical symbols 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 10994 % 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2127}{\ensuremath\mho}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BE}{\ensuremath\upharpoonright}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21DD}{\ensuremath\leadsto}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2201}{\ensuremath\complement}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228F}{\ensuremath\sqsubset}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2290}{\ensuremath\sqsupset}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11069 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B4}{\ensuremath\unlhd}% 11079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B5}{\ensuremath\unrhd}% 11080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11082 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11088 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11091 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11094 % 11095 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25A1}{\ensuremath\Box}% 11096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\Diamond}% 11101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11104 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11108 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11111 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11115 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11118 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11121 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11122 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A1D}{\ensuremath\Join}% 11123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11124 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11125 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11126 % 11127 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11128 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11129}% end of \unicodechardefs 11130 11131% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11132% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11133\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11134 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11135 \unicodechardefs 11136} 11137 11138% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11139% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11140% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11141% printing the correct glyphs. 11142\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11143\passthroughcharsfalse 11144 11145% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11146% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11147% 11148\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11149 \catcode"#1=\active 11150 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11151 \begingroup 11152 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11153 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11154 \ifpassthroughchars 11155 ##1% 11156 \else 11157 ##3% 11158 \fi 11159 } 11160 \endgroup 11161 } 11162 \begingroup 11163 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11164 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11165 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11166 \endgroup 11167} 11168 11169% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11170% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11171\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11172 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11173 \unicodechardefs 11174} 11175 11176% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11177% make the character token expand 11178% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11179\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11180 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11181 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11182} 11183 11184% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11185\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11186 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11187 \unicodechardefs 11188} 11189 11190% US-ASCII character definitions. 11191\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11192 \relax 11193} 11194 11195% define all Unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U. 11196\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11197 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11198\else 11199 \utfeightchardefs 11200\fi 11201 11202 11203% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 11204% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 11205% document encoding. 11206% 11207\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 11208 11209 11210\message{formatting,} 11211 11212\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11213 11214\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11215\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11216\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11217 11218% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11219\vbadness = 10000 11220 11221% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11222\hbadness = 6666 11223 11224% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11225\widowpenalty=10000 11226\clubpenalty=10000 11227 11228% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11229% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11230% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11231% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11232% 11233\def\setemergencystretch{% 11234 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11235 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11236 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11237 \else 11238 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11239 \fi 11240} 11241 11242% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11243% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11244% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11245% 11246% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11247% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11248% 11249\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11250 \voffset = #3\relax 11251 \topskip = #6\relax 11252 \splittopskip = \topskip 11253 % 11254 \vsize = #1\relax 11255 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11256 \outervsize = \vsize 11257 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11258 \txipageheight = \vsize 11259 % 11260 \hsize = #2\relax 11261 \outerhsize = \hsize 11262 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11263 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11264 % 11265 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11266 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11267 % 11268 \ifpdf 11269 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11270 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11271 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11272 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11273 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11274 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11275 \else 11276 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11277 \else 11278 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11279 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11280 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11281 \fi 11282 \fi 11283 % 11284 \setleading{\textleading} 11285 % 11286 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11287 \setemergencystretch 11288} 11289 11290% @letterpaper (the default). 11291\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11292 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11293 \textleading = 13.2pt 11294 % 11295 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11296 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11297 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11298 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11299 {11in}{8.5in}% 11300}} 11301 11302% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11303\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11304 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11305 \textleading = 12pt 11306 % 11307 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11308 {-.2in}{0in}% 11309 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11310 {9.25in}{7in}% 11311 % 11312 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11313 \tolerance = 700 11314 \hfuzz = 1pt 11315 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11316 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11317}} 11318 11319% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11320% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11321\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11322 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11323 \textleading = 12pt 11324 % 11325 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11326 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11327 {0pt}{14pt}% 11328 {9in}{6in}% 11329 % 11330 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11331 \tolerance = 700 11332 \hfuzz = 1pt 11333 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11334 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11335}} 11336 11337% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11338\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11339 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11340 \textleading = 13.2pt 11341 % 11342 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11343 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11344 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11345 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11346 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11347 % your texinfo source file like this: 11348 % @tex 11349 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11350 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11351 % @end tex 11352 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11353 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11354 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11355 {297mm}{210mm}% 11356 % 11357 \tolerance = 700 11358 \hfuzz = 1pt 11359 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11360 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11361}} 11362 11363% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11364% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11365% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11366\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11367 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11368 \textleading = 12.5pt 11369 % 11370 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11371 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11372 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11373 {210mm}{148mm}% 11374 % 11375 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11376 \tolerance = 800 11377 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 11378 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11379 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11380 \tableindent = 12mm 11381}} 11382 11383% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11384\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11385 \afourpaper 11386 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11387 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11388 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11389 {297mm}{210mm}% 11390 % 11391 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11392 \globaldefs = 0 11393}} 11394 11395% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11396\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11397 \afourpaper 11398 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11399 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11400 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11401 {297mm}{210mm}% 11402 \globaldefs = 0 11403}} 11404 11405% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11406% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11407% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11408% 11409\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11410\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11411 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11412 \globaldefs = 1 11413 % 11414 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11415 \setleading{\textleading}% 11416 % 11417 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11418 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11419 % 11420 \dimen2 = \hsize 11421 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11422 % 11423 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11424 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11425 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11426 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11427}} 11428 11429% Set default to letter. 11430% 11431\letterpaper 11432 11433 11434\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11435 11436\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11437 11438% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11439\catcode`\^^? = 14 11440 11441% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11442\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11443\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11444\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11445\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11446\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11447\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11448\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11449\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11450\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11451 11452% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11453% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11454% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11455% 11456% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11457% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11458% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11459% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11460% 11461\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11462 11463% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11464% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11465% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11466% this is not a problem. 11467\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11468 11469% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11470 11471% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11472% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11473% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11474% 11475\catcode`\"=\active 11476\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11477\let"=\activedoublequote 11478\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11479\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11480\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11481 11482\catcode`\_=\active 11483\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11484\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11485\let\realunder=_ 11486 11487\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11488 11489\chardef \less=`\< 11490\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11491\chardef \gtr=`\> 11492\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11493\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11494\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11495\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11496 11497 11498% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11499% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11500\def\texinfochars{% 11501 \let< = \activeless 11502 \let> = \activegtr 11503 \let~ = \activetilde 11504 \let^ = \activehat 11505 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11506 \let\b = \strong 11507 \let\i = \smartitalic 11508 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11509} 11510 11511% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11512% parsing them. 11513\def\turnoffactive{% 11514 \normalturnoffactive 11515 \otherbackslash 11516} 11517 11518\catcode`\@=0 11519 11520% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11521% as in \char`\\. 11522\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11523\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 11524 11525% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 11526% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 11527{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 11528 11529% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11530% in fixed width font. 11531\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11532 11533% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11534% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11535% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11536% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11537% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11538% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11539% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11540% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11541 11542@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11543@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11544 11545% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 11546% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11547% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 11548@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 11549@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11550 11551% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11552% the literal character `\'. 11553% 11554{@catcode`- = @active 11555 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11556 @passthroughcharstrue 11557 @let-=@normaldash 11558 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11559 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11560 @let+=@normalplus 11561 @let<=@normalless 11562 @let>=@normalgreater 11563 @let^=@normalcaret 11564 @let_=@normalunderscore 11565 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11566 @let~=@normaltilde 11567 @let\=@ttbackslash 11568 @markupsetuplqdefault 11569 @markupsetuprqdefault 11570 @unsepspaces 11571 } 11572} 11573 11574% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11575% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11576% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11577@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11578 11579% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11580% 11581% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11582% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11583% a backslash. 11584% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11585% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11586% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11587% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11588{ 11589@catcode`@^=7 11590@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11591 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11592 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11593 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11594 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11595 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11596 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11597 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11598}} 11599 11600{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11601@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11602 11603% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11604% appears by mistake. 11605{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11606@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11607 @gdef^^M{% 11608 @par% 11609 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11610}}} 11611 11612 11613@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11614 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11615 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11616 @enableemergencynewline 11617 @let@c=@texinfoc 11618 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11619 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11620 @catcode`+=@active 11621 @catcode`@_=@active 11622 % 11623 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11624 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11625 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11626 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11627 % file for Texinfo. 11628 % 11629 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11630 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11631 @closein 1 11632} 11633 11634 11635% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11636@escapechar = `@@ 11637 11638% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11639% active definitions as the normal characters. 11640@def@normaldot{.} 11641@def@normalquest{?} 11642@def@normalslash{/} 11643 11644% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11645% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11646@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11647@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11648@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11649 11650@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11651 11652@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11653@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11654@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11655@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11656@catcode`@'=@active 11657@catcode`@`=@active 11658@markupsetuplqdefault 11659@markupsetuprqdefault 11660 11661@c Local variables: 11662@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 11663@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11664@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11665@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11666@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11667@c End: 11668 11669@c vim:sw=2: 11670 11671@enablebackslashhack 11672